Ir5000 User Guide

E82_US.
book Page 1 Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
Series
User’s Guide
imageRUNNER 5000 Series

E82_US.book Page 2 Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series. This Manual describes the method
of using the imageRUNNER 5000 Series, its Copy and Mail Box functions, and the parts that are
common to each function.
Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the imageRUNNER 5000 Series in order to
familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this
manual store it in a safe place for future reference.
CAUTION:
In this manual, CAUTION MESSAGES with this symbol indicate that neglecting the
suggested procedure or practice could result in personal injury.
NOTICE:
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, some of the data contained
herein may not exactly reflect the current model of the particular product with which this manual
has been included. If you have a need for an exact specification, please contact Canon for the
current specification.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another
language without prior written consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright ©2000 Canon Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
International Energy Star-Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this
copier model meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is an international program that
promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program
backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce
energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate
voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the Operator’s Manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the
manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop
operation of the equipment.
2
How This Manual is Organized
Before You Start Using This Machine

CHAPTER This chapter describes the name and function of each part of the machine, and also the
method of placing an original after switching ON the machine.
Basic Copying
CHAPTER This chapter describes the basic copy functions.
Useful Copy Functions

This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
CHAPTER
Using the Mail Box Functions

This chapter describes the Mail Box functions that enable you to temporarily store or print
CHAPTER
data.
Printing Efficiently
This chapter describes how to make the next copy, or a print from another function, while a
CHAPTER
print is being made, how to check the printing status, and how to change or cancel printing.
Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

This chapter describes the default settings and how to change them to suit your needs.
CHAPTER
Loading Paper and Adding Toner

This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.
CHAPTER
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
CHAPTER
Handling Options
This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an
CHAPTER
optional unit.
Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to

CHAPTER Enter Alphabet Characters
This chapter describes how to use the Control Card, enter characters, etc.
Appendix
CHAPTER This chapter describes the specifications of this machine and optional units, index, etc.
Some information in this manual is also relevant when using the Printer functions etc. of the
imageRUNNER 5000 Series. Please use this manual in combination with the other manuals (printer
manual etc.) when using the printer functions.
How This Manual is Organized 3

Safety Information
A. Laser Safety
This Product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard accord-
ing to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the Product does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the Product is completely confined within protective housings and
external covers, the laser beam can not escape from the machine during any phase of user opera-
tion.
B. CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser
products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the
United States. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be
attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT: UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN
ABDECKUNG GEÖFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜERBRÜKT
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION: RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS
D’OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE
AU FAISCEAU.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the man-
ual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CANON INC.
3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPAN
CANON U.S.A., INC
ONE CANON PLAZA, LAKE SUCCESS, N.Y. 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 DIXIE ROAD MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO L5T, 1P7, CANADA
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21
CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.
4 Safety Information
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals

This machine can also be used in a network or as a printer, when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit
(option) is attached. Refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function as well as this manual.
IMPORTANT
• You can use the Remote UI when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.
• The Printer function may be attached as standard depending on the system configuration.
How to Use this Machine User’s Guide

Troubleshooting (This Document)
For Remote UI Use Remote UI Guide
For setting up the network connection &

installing the CD-ROM software Setup Guide
For Postscript/PCL Use PS/PCL Reference Guide
For Installing the Printer Driver, etc

PS Driver Guide
For Installing the Printer Driver, etc PCL Driver Guide
For Connecting and Setting the Network Network Guide
The manuals supplied with option equipment are included in the list above.
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some manuals may be unavailable
(irrelevant).
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This

Manual
This machine makes effective use of a memory in order to perform print operations efficiently. For
example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can scan the
next person’s original to make a copy without any need to wait. You can also print from this machine
by using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a
complex way, so not only copies but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their
turn before they can be output.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning”, “printing” and “copying” used in
this manual are defined as set out below. There are some cases in which the scanning of an original
when making a copy, and the process of making a print are described separately.
Scanning:
Scanning an original to be copied, or

scanning an original to be stored as data
in a box.
Printing:
Outputting a copy, outputting data

stored in a box, or outputting data sent
from a personal computer to the
machine.
Copying:
Printing data scanned from an original, followed by finishing (stapling, etc.).
6 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Table of Contents
How This Manual is Organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Warning Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Provide Adequate Installation Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Moving the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing
of Scanned Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Various Kinds of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting the Specifications According to the Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . 43
Displaying a Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
You can Read the Messages From the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Functions that Conserve Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Daily Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auto Drawer Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Auto Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copy Waiting Time Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Paper Supply Indicator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Paper Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table of Contents 7
Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Control Panel Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Chapter 2 Basic Copying
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Stop
Canceling with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom). . . . .2-16
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and
Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from
Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper
Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently
for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Adjusting Copy Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
8 Table of Contents
Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-38
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-40
Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . 2-43
Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book
(Book 2-Sided). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode
(Setting Confirmation/Cancel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate

Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter
Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between
Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . 3-17
Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . 3-18
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy
Sheet (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each
Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder
(Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory
(Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Storing a Memory Key Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Table of Contents 9
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . .3-62
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions
Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Printing Documents Stored in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name) . . . .4-9
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the
Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in
One Step (Two-page Separation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . .4-28
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print
Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder
(Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . .4-45
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted
(Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . .4-61
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61
Collating Prints (Finisher). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63
Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed
Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . .4-75
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory
(Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Docu-
ment (Sample Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Checking the Document’s Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Moving a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
10 Table of Contents
Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Chapter 5 Printing Efficiently
Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode). 5-3
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up
(Auto Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the
Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking and Changing Printing Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function
(Common Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . 6-15
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table of Contents 11
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24

Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations. . . . .6-26
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after
Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . .6-28
Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days
of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and
Print Image Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings). . . . . . . .6-35
Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . .6-46
Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID
(System Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Setting the Auto Offline On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74
Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Chapter 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Consumables and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Routine Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty
(Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Chapter 9 Handling Options
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Table of Contents 13
Removing Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Chapter 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter
Alphabet Characters
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Operations after Using Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Entering Special Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Setting in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Chapter 11 Appendix
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Card Reader-C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Chart of Available Combination of Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Mail Box Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
How to Use This Manual

The descriptions in this manual are presented using the following general format.
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page 1

Separation)
This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or magazine on separate sheets of paper.
Original Copy
1 1
3
2
3
IMPORTANT
• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in
the Two-page Separation mode.
• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Saddle Stitch, Two-sided, Cover/Sheet
Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image
4
Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
• When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode.
(See “Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided),” on p. 2-45.)
Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

5
1 Place your original on the platen glass and
6 press the [Special Features] key.
7 (See “Placing Originals,” on p.1-11.)
NOTE
• If you want to make copies in page order, begin
9
ABC
8
copying from the first pages and work your way
forward.
• Place the original face down so that the original’s
top edge is against the back edge of the platen
glass.
2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.
3-2 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)
The above sample page does not actually exist in this manual.
1 Section Title 7 Reference

Page and chapter numbers containing related items
2 Chapter Title are provided.
3 Description of modes and examples of 8 NOTE
output Indicates notes for operation or additional
4 IMPORTANT explanations. Reading these is recommended.
Indicates operational warnings. Be certain to read 9 Illustrations
these items so that you operate the machine correctly. Illustrations to help you identify keys and parts of the
5 Subsection Title machine.
6 Operation Instructions
Numbered steps describe how to set and operate
various functions.
How to Use This Manual 15

Symbols Used in This Manual

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always
WARNING pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons or
damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine
CAUTION safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items
IMPORTANT to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage to the machine.
Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is
NOTE recommended.
The following symbols, key names and unit names are used in this manual.
Start
Key on control panel key Key on touch panel display [OK] key
Unless otherwise mentioned, screenshots of the touch panel display and illustrations used in this
manual are those taken when the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Paper Deck-G1 are attached to the
imageRUNNER 5000.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options are not displayed in the
touch panel display.
The keys which are to be operated are marked with as shown below in this manual.
When multiple keys which should be operated are displayed in a touch panel display, all
keys are marked. Select the key which suit your needs.
16 Symbols Used in This Manual

Safety Considerations
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint
thinner or other inflammable substances. If
inflammable substances come into contact with
electrical parts inside the machine, this may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine.

If these items come into contact with a high-volt-
age area inside the machine, this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots and other containers
filled with water or liquids
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the
machine, immediately turn OFF the main power
switch and unplug the power plug from the out-
let. Then, contact your service representative.
CAUTION
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations
such as on unsteady platforms or on inclined
floors, or in locations which are subject to exces-
sive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to
fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Do not install the machine in such a way that the

ventilation ports are blocked by objects. If the
ventilation ports are blocked, heat will build up
inside the machine and may result in a fire.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as

they may tip over or fall resulting in personal
injury.
Safety Considerations 17
• Do not install the machine in the following loca-

tions.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location which is exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location that is subject to open flames
• Do not remove the machine’s fixing stoppers

after the machine has been installed, as this may
cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in
personal injury.
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also,
do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or
pull on or excessively bend it, as this could
cause electrical damage and result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet

hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
18 Safety Considerations
• Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power

strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot,

as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Insert the power cord completely into the outlet,

as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the provided

power cord, as this may result in a fire or electri-
cal shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.

Using an extension cord may result in a fire or
electrical shock. If an extension cord must be
used, however, untie the cord binding and insert
the power plug completely into the extension
cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between
the power and extension cords.
• If the breaker drops to the OFF position when

you turn ON the power switch or when the copier
is already ON, do not push the breaker back to
the ON position. Doing so may lead to a fire, elec-
trical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other
breakers in the facility. When this happens,
unplug the power plug immediately and contact
ON
your service representative.
CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other
than 120 V AC, as this may result in a fire or elec-
trical shock.
• Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging

the power plug. Pulling on the power cord may
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise dam-
age the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this
could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire
or electrical shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so

that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are
placed around the power plug, you will be unable
to unplug it in an emergency.
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the
machine. There are high-temperature and high-
voltage components inside the machine which
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• If the machine makes strange noises, or emits

smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn
OFF the main power switch and unplug the
power plug from the outlet. Then, contact your
service representative. Continued use of the
machine in this condition may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the

machine. If gas from these sprays comes into
contact with the electrical components inside the
machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• When moving the machine, first turn OFF the

power switch, and then unplug the power plug.
Failure to do so will damage the power cord
which may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal

objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill
water, liquids or flammable substances (alcohol,
benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine.
If these items come into contact with a high-volt-
age area inside the machine, this may result in a
fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped
or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn
OFF the main power switch and unplug the
power plug from the socket. Then, contact your
service representative.
CAUTION
• Close the Feeder gently to avoid catching your
hand, as this may result in personal injury.
• Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is

printing, as this may result in personal injury.
• Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the

machine will not be used for a long period of time
such as overnight. Also, unplug the power plug
for safety when the machine will not be used for
an extended period of time such as during con-
secutive holidays.
• Do not place your hand in the part of the tray

where stapling is performed while a Finisher is
attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Maintenance and Inspections

WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the
main power switch and unplug the power plug.
Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
• Clean the machine using a firmly wrung-out cloth

dampened with a mild cleansing detergent. Do
not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other
flammable substances. If flammable substances
come into contact with a high-voltage area inside
the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Do not throw used toner bottles into open flames,

as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the
bottles and result in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least
once a year, and clean the area around the base
of the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is
removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may
result in a fire.
• There are some areas inside the machine which

are subject to high voltages and high tempera-
tures. Take adequate precautions when perform-
ing internal inspections to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
• The simbol inside the machine indicates that

the area is subject to high temperature, and not
to be touched without care.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspect-

ing the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-
laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch
the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.
• When removing paper which has become

jammed inside the machine, take care not to
allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into
contact with your hands or clothing, as this will
dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing
with warm water will set the toner and make it
impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become

jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper
from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth.
If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immedi-
ately with cold water and consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed origi-

nals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the original or paper.
• When removing used toner bottles from the toner

supply port, remove the bottles carefully to pre-
vent toner from scattering and entering your eyes
or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth,
wash immediately with cold water and consult a
physician.
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not throw toner bottles into open flames, as
this may cause the toner to ignite and result in
burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner bottles or paper in places

exposed to open flames, as this may cause the
toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a
fire.
• When discarding the toner bottles, put the bot-

tles in a bag to prevent the toner from scattering,
and dispose of it as a non-flammable.
CAUTION
• Keep toner and other consumables out of the
reach of small children. If these items are
ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Warning Indications
CAUTION
• The laser unit inside the machine emits laser light. Under no circumstances open the cover of the
laser unit or remove the label attached to the cover. If the laser light escapes from the machine,
exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open.


DANGER- Laser radiation when open

and interlock defeated.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM.

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current.
Be sure to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor scanning before
starting periodic inspection of the breaker.
• If a malfunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your service representative.
1 Press the test button located at the bottom left

of this machine.
NOTE
• Push the test button with the tip of the ball-point
pen, etc.
• For details of the location of the breaker when the
Finisher is attached, see “Internal View,” on p. 1-3.
2 The breaker lever automatically goes to OFF

(“ ” side). Confirm that the power is cut OFF.
IMPORTANT
• Do not use the test button to turn the power ON
and OFF.
• If the breaker lever does not go to OFF (“ ”
side), repeat step 1.
• If the breaker lever does not go to OFF (“ ”
side) despite carrying out the above procedure
two or three times, contact your service repre-
sentative.
3 Once you confirmed that the above operation

takes place, press the main power switch to
OFF (“ ” side).
26 Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

4 Move the breaker lever to ON (“ I ” side).
5 Press the main power switch to ON (“ I ” side)
6 Fill in the check sheet for the periodic inspection of the breaker at the end of this manual.
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker 27

Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
• Avoid locations which are subject to low
temperatures and low humidity, or high
temperatures and high humidity.
For example, avoid installing the machine near
water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers,
air conditioners, heaters and stoves.
• Avoid installing the machine in the direct

sunlight.
If unavoidable, shade the machine using cur-
tains.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

During use, the machine generates ozone.
However, the amount of ozone generated is not
enough to affect the human body. Neverthe-
less, if the machine is used for a prolonged
period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or
when making a large quantity of prints, be sure
to ventilate the room to make the working envi-
ronment as comfortable as possible.
• Avoid locations where a considerable
amount of dust accumulates.
28 Installation Precautions
• Avoid locations where ammonia gas is

emitted.
• Avoid locations near volatile flammables,
such as alcohol or paint thinner.
• Avoid locations which are subject to vibra-
tions.
For example, avoid installing the machine on
unstable floors or stands.
• Avoid rapid changes in temperature.

If the room in which the machine is installed is
rapidly heated from a low temperature, con-
densation may form inside the machine. This
can adversely affect print quality or result in an
inability to obtain print images.
• Avoid installing the machine near comput-
ers or other precision electronic equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated
by the machine during printing can adversely
affect the operation of such equipment.
• Avoid installing the machine near televi-
sions, radios or other similar electronic
equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and
picture signal reception, etc. Plug the machine
into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as
much space as possible between the machine
and other electronic equipment.
• About the machine’s fixing stoppers.
- Do not remove the machine’s fixing stoppers after
the machine has been installed.
- If you put weight on the front of the machine while
the paper drawers or units within the machine are
pulled out all the way, the machine might fall for-
ward. To prevent this from happening, make sure
that the machine’s fixing stoppers are set in place.
Installation Precautions 29
Select a Safe Power Supply

• Plug the machine into a 120V AC outlet.
• Do not plug other electrical equipment into
the outlet to which the machine is con-
nected.
• Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug
power strip. Doing so might cause a fire.
• The power cable may become damaged if it
is often stepped on or heavy objects are
placed on it. Continued use of a damaged
power cable can lead to an accident.
Provide Adequate Installation Space

• Provide enough space on each side of the
machine for unrestricted operation.
■ When the Paper Deck-G1, the Saddle Finisher-F2, ■ When the Copy Tray-C3 is
and the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached. attached.
(Each option in extended condition)
more than 2-3/8" (60 mm) more than 2-3/8" (60 mm)
29-1/4" (743 mm)
29-1/4" (743 mm)

49" (1,244 mm)
49" (1,244 mm)
85-1/8" (2,162 mm) 52-5/8" (1,335 mm)
Moving the Machine

• If you intend to move the machine, contact
your service representative beforehand.
30 Installation Precautions
Handling Precautions
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify
the machine.
• Some parts inside the machine are subject
to high voltages and temperatures. Take
adequate precaution when inspecting the
inside of the machine. Do not carry out any
inspections not described in this manual.
• Be careful not to drop any foreign objects

such as paper clips or staples inside the
machine. If a foreign object comes into con-
tact with electrical parts inside the
machine, it might cause a short circuit and
result in a fire or an electrical shock.
• If there is unusual noise or smoke, immedi-
ately turn the main power switch OFF, then
call your service representative. Using the
machine in this state might cause a fire or
an electric shock. Also, avoid placing
objects around the plug so that the
machine can be unplugged whenever nec-
essary.
• Do not turn the main power switch OFF or
open the front door during the operation.
This might result in paper jams.
• To avoid danger of ignition, do not use flam-
mable aerosol products near the machine.
• If the machine will not be used for a pro-
longed period of time, for example during
the night, turn the main power switch OFF.
• There may be an accident or a defect with the
hard disk in the machine, causing loss, destruc-
tion or alternation of data received or stored on
the hard disk. You are recommended not to store
data on the hard disk without having copies or
print-outs of such data outside.
CAUTION
• CANON RECOMMENDS THAT DATA STORED ON THE PROD-
UCT’S HARD DISK DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR BACKED UP
TO PREVENT ITS LOSS IN THE EVENT OF FAILURE OR
OTHER MALFUNCTION OF THE HARD DISK DRIVE. NEITHER
CANON NOR ANY SERVICE PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE
FOR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF DATA STORED ON THE
PRODUCT’S HARD DISK DRIVE (SEE THE TERMS OF THE
PRODUCT’S LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS).
Handling Precautions 31
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use

and Printing of Scanned Images
Using your Scanner to reproduce certain documents, and the printing and use of such reproduc-
tions, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list
of these document is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain of
the legality of using your Scanner to reproduce any particular document, and/or the printing and use
of such reproductions, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
● Paper money
● Travelers Cheques
● Money Orders
● Food Stamps
● Certificates of Deposit
● Passports
● Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Immigration Papers
● Identifying badges or insignias
● Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Selective Service or draft papers
● Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
● Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
● Stock Certificates
● Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
● Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
32 Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned
Images
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys
following the messages in the touch panel display, you can utilize the functions of this machine.
Various Kinds of Copies

Basic Features Screen
The screen below, which appears when the machine is ready to make copies, is called the Basic Features
screen.
Job/Print monitor area

Displays the current status of the copy job or other functions.
Press to select the paper and the feeding posi- Press to make copies at a different copy ratio.
tion of the paper. (See “Selecting the Copy Pa- (See “Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio),” on
per Size (Paper Select),” on p. 2-9.) p. 2-16.)
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 33

Press to select or cancel Collate, Group, or Press to select or cancel the Two-sided mode.
Staple collate modes. (See “Collating Copies You can copy one-sided/ two-sided originals
(Finisher),” on p. 2-48.) and facing pages of an original, such as
• When you select the [Collate] key. books, on both the front and back sides of the
paper, and make one-sided copies from two-
sided originals. (See “Two-sided Copying (Two-
sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)
REPORT REPORT • When you select the [1 2-Sided] key.
REPORT
REPORT
REPORT
1 1
2 1
3
4 1
1
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to manually con- Press to copy originals specifying the image
trol the copy exposure. Press the [A] key to se- quality (text only, text and photo, photo only).
lect or cancel Auto Exposure Control. (See You can also select the type of photo (printed
“Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Ex- image/photo) when you set the photo mode in
posure),” on p. 2-32.) the Additional Functions beforehand. (See
“Selecting Image Quality,” on p. 2-33.)
SCENE SCENE SCENE The world’s coral reefs, where

brilliantly colored fish and a
The world’s coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a
myriad of other tropical creatures myriad of other tropical creatures
come together.
come together. Aptly nicknamed
“Tropical Forests under the sea”,
these spots of breathtaking
beauty serve as home to
countless varieties of life, and to
us of the land, this alluring,
dream-like world forms a tropical
paradise filled with romance.
Press to select the Special Features mode. Press to check the printing status, change the
(See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions”.) printing sequence or cancel printing. (See
“Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on
p. 5-13.)
34 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Special Features Screen
When you press the [Special Features] key in the Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen appears
in the touch panel display. The Special Features screen displays special functions available for copying. In
some functions, when a function is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears.
To close the Special Features screen and return to the Basic Features screen, press the [Done] key. Pressing
Guide
the ? key after selecting a function brings up a help screen with guidance information.
Special Features Screen 1/2
Press to select or cancel the Two-page Sepa- Press to add covers. Also press to add inser-
ration mode. This mode enables you to copy tion sheets or chapter pages between speci-
two pages of an opened book onto separate fied pages. (See “Adding Front and Back
copy sheets. (See “Making Copies of Facing Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages
Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion),” on p. 3-4.)
Sheets (Two-page Separation),” on p. 3-2.) • When you select the [Front Cover] key.
REPORT REPORT
1 1

Press when making copies of several originals Press to select or cancel the Transparency
to form a booklet. (See “Making Copies for Use Interleaving mode. This mode enables you to
as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 3-9.) insert a sheet between each transparency
when copying transparencies. (See “Making
Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved be-
tween Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving),” on
1
p. 3-13.)
2
3 REPORT REPORT
Transparency
4
REPORT
2
7
8 1
8 1
4
5
6 3 6 3
5 Interleaf
6 sheet
7
8
Press to select or cancel the Shift mode. This Press to select or cancel the Margin mode.
mode enables you to shift the position of the This mode enables you to create margins
original image on the copy sheet. (See “Making along the sides of copies. (See “Making Copies
Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift),” on p. with Margins (Margin),” on p. 3-21.)
3-16.)
• When you select the [Center Shift Corner
Shift] key.

Press to select or cancel the Frame Erase Press to select or cancel the Image Combina-
mode. This mode enables you to eliminate tion mode. This mode enables you to automat-
dark border areas and lines that appear around ically reduce two, four or eight originals to fit on
original images, or shadows from punched a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet. (See “Re-
holes. (See “Erasing Shadows and Frame ducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a
Lines from Copies (Frame Erase),” on p. 3-24.) Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination),” on p. 3-
• When you select the [Original Frame Erase] 33.)
key. • When you select the [2 On 1] key.
Frame Erase
selected
Frame Erase
not selected
1
1 2
2
Press to select or cancel the Image Separation Press to make copies feeding different-size
mode. This mode enables you to divide an originals together in one group in the feeder.
original into 2 or 4 sections and enlarge each (See “Feeding Different-size Originals Togeth-
section onto a copy sheet of specified size. er in the Feeder (Different Size Originals),” on p. 3-43.)
(See “Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections
and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate
Copy Sheet (Image Separation),” on p. 3-38.)
• When you select the [1 to 2] key. 11"x17" original
CITY CITY
LTR original
CITY
Original feeding
1 2
direction
1

Press to divide the originals into several parts Press to store or recall copy jobs. (See “Stor-
and scan them, then subsequently print them ing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in
all together. This is convenient when you can- Memory (Mode Memory),” on p. 3-48.)
not load all of the originals that you want to
copy at one time. (See “Copying Separately-
Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45.)
Press to recall a previously set copy job.

(See “Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall),”
on p. 3-58.)

Special Features Screen 2/2
Press to make copies with the entire black/ Press to copy an original with the image re-
white image inverted. (See “Inverting Original peated in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Images (Nega/Posi),” on p. 3-60.) (See “Making Copies with the Original Image
Repeated (Image Repeat),” on p. 3-62.)
SCENE SCENE CITY
CITY
CITY
Press to copy the image of the original re- Press to select or cancel the Sharpness mode.
versed as reflection of the mirror. (See “Mak- This mode enables you to make copies of orig-
ing Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image),” inal images with the contrast reproduced more
on p. 3-65.) sharply. (See “Making Sharp Contrast Copies
(Sharpness),” on p. 3-67.)

You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience

When you press the key, the Box selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store
MAIL BOX
data scanned using this machine, or data sent from a personal computer as if storing documents in binders.
The documents (data) stored in a box can be printed whenever necessary. Also, when you set the Merge Doc-
uments mode, you can print documents stored separately together as one document.
100 boxes
Scanning Sending
various data from
originals computers
Printing By storing a password,

1
merged
documents you can print data You can print data
without other people whenever desired, with
observing it. the settings necessary.
1
IMPORTANT
• Each box can store up to 100 items of document or image data.
• You can store a total of up to 1,000 items of document or image data, or up to 3,700 pages (LTR-size
Canon Standard Chart) of document or image data, in all boxes. Depending on the conditions under
which the hard disk is used, it may not be possible to attain the above values in some cases.
NOTE
• For details on how to use the Mail Box, see Chapter 4 “Using the Mail Box Functions”.

Box Selection Screen
You can store a name of a box

or a password in the Mail Box
Settings of the Additional Func-
tions. (See “Setting Specifica-
tions of the Mail Box Function
(Mail Box Settings),” on p. 6-46.)
Select a box
Document Selection Screen
Originals scanned in the same

way as a Copy function, or doc-
uments sent from a personal
computer are stored in a box.
Select a document and
Printing Screen Scanning Screen
Prints documents stored in a box. When you You can set various settings when scanning
press the [Change P Settings] key, you can originals. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,”
change the print settings. (See “Printing Doc- on p. 4-3.)
uments Stored in the Box,” on p. 4-6.)
Start
key

You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs

System Monitor Screen
By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing document, cancel printing, or spec-
ify the printing priority.
Ç¢
NOTE
• For a description of functions, see Chapter 5 “Printing Efficiently”.
• The status of each icon displayed in the screen is as follows:
: Copy job : Error
: Printer job : Paper jam
: Box job : Add toner
When you press the [Secured Print] key, you When you press the [Print Next] key, you can
can print the document sent from a computer change the printing order of the selected docu-
with a password. To print the document with a ment to be printed after the current print job is
password, you need to enter that password. As completed. (See “Priority Printing,” on p. 5-16.)
these documents will not be printed unless the
password is entered, you can print classified
documents preventing other people from ob-
serving them. (See “Printing Secured Docu-
ments,” on p. 5-20.)

Setting the Specifications According to the Method of Use

Additional Functions Screen
Additional Functions
When you press the key, the Additional Functions screen appears in the touch panel display. With Ad-
ditional Functions, you can set the specifications common to all functions. By pressing the [Copy Settings] key,
you can change the default settings of copy functions. For example, you can set Auto Orientation to On or Off,
or set the Auto Collate to On or Off.
NOTE
Reset
• Settings made in the Additional Functions screen will not be changed even when you press the key.
• For details on how to set custom settings, see Chapter 6 “Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit
Your Needs”.
• When the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is not attached, [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote
UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed.
• When the Network Multi-PDL Network Kit is not attached, [Report Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote
UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed.
• When the Network Scan function is not enabled, the [Auto Offline] key is not displayed.
• For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.
- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)
- [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.)
- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)

Displaying a Guide Screen

Guide Function Screen
Guide
Pressing the ? key brings up a guide screen with information about the various features that are available with
your machine.
Usage Guide
Guide
Pressing the ? key after selecting a function brings up a
guide screen with an explanation for that function. Use this
guide function if you do not understand how to use the mode
you are setting.
(In this example, the Margin mode has been selected.)

Guide
If you press the ? key while setting [Margin], the touch pan-
el display changes to the Guide Function Screen shown on
the right. To return to the display for [Margin], press the
[Done] key.
Information Guide
This machine supports many functions.

To find the right function for your particular needs or to find
Guide
a simple description of a function, press the ? key while the
Basic Features screen or Special Features screen is dis-
played. The Information Guide screen appears in the touch
panel display as shown on the right.
Example: When copying photo originals:

Press the [Various originals] key.
You can display simple explanations of the various types of
originals using the [▼] or [▲] key. Press the [Done] key to
return to the Various originals menu screen. To return the
display to the Guide Menu, press the [Guide Menu] key.

You can Read the Messages From the System Manager

A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the
system manager using the utility software.
NOTE
• The message board can be used when the network printer function is attached.
The following three types of message board are available:
A message board without the [Done] key.
A message board with the [Done] key.
NOTE
• If you press the [Done] key and close the message
board, you can perform normal operation. The mes-
sage appears again when the main power is turned
back ON, or after Auto Clear has taken place. You
can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in
one-minute increments. You can also cancel this
function. (See “Setting the Time Taken for Display to
Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations,”
on p. 6-27.)
A message board which the message appears in the

Job/ Print monitor area.
NOTE
• For details on how to erase the message board, see
“Erasing a Message Board,” on p. 6-73.

Functions that Conserve Power Consumption

You can conserve power consumption efficiently using the following functions when the machine is
not operated.
NOTE
• There will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time.
• The touch panel display will turn OFF when the machine enters one of these functions.
• You can print data sent from a computer even when the machine enters one of these functions.
Energy Saver Mode

Energy Saver
When the machine will not be used for a long time, you can press the key to put the machine in Energy
Saver mode. This reduces the temperature of machine’s fixing unit and thereby conserves energy. To start op-
Energy Saver
erations again, press the key once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also reactivates the
machine.
NOTE
• The following Energy Saver Mode settings can be selected: –10% mode, –25% mode, –50% mode, and
None mode. (See “Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting,” on p. 6-14.)
Low-Power Mode
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a period of about 15 minutes after prints have been
made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. The Low-Power
mode reduces energy consumption by lowering the fixation temperature. This function meets the ENERGY
STAR® Program for energy efficiency. To start operations again, press the
Energy Saver
key once more. Pressing the
control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.
NOTE
• The Low-Power Mode Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the Low-Power
Mode Time,” on p. 6-30.)
Sleep Mode
The Sleep mode reduces more power consumption than the Energy Saver mode and the Low-Power mode.
You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire by pressing the control panel power
switch. However there will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time. To reactivate the ma-
chine, press the control panel power switch. The Basic Features screen will appear on the touch panel display.
NOTE
• Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using your machine for a prolonged period of time, for
example at night.
• The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep
after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-26.)
46 Functions that Conserve Power Consumption

Quiet Mode
If this machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made
or the key operation performed, the device sounds from this machine are stopped, and the machine enters the
Quiet mode.
NOTE
• The Quiet Mode settings are in the range from 0 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. (See “Setting the
Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task,” on p. 6-28.)
Daily Timer
At the time and day of the week set with the daily timer, the control panel power switch automatically turns OFF.
To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch.
NOTE
• The Daily Timer settings are in the range from Sunday to Saturday and from 00:00 to 23:59. (See “Setting
the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week,” on p. 6-29.)
Precedence relation of each function

- You can set the machine to enter the Energy Saver mode when the machine is neither in the Low-Power mode
nor the Sleep mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 15 minutes while the machine is in the Energy Saver mode,
the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.
- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 1 hour when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, or at
the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer, the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode.
- If the time set for the Auto Sleep mode to take place is shorter than that of the Low-Power mode, the Auto Sleep
mode has priority. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of
the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
- Even before the time set with the Auto Sleep mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of
the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
In the case of default settings :

(Low-Power mode : 15 minutes, Auto Sleep mode : 1 hour, Daily Timer : no setting)
YouEnergycan
Saver
set the Energy Saver mode whenever desired by pressing
the key during this period.
Energy Saver mode
Low-Power mode Low-Power mode
Auto Sleep mode Sleep mode
Operation done 15 minutes 1 hour Time
Functions that Conserve Power Consumption 47

Other Useful Functions

Auto Drawer Switching Function
If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper drawer
loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
NOTE
• You can set whether or not a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each function. (See
“Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 6-10.)
Auto Clear Function

If the machine is not operated for a period of about 2 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation
performed, it automatically returns the Settings to the Standard mode.
NOTE
• You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments. (See “Setting the Time
Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-27.)
Copy Waiting Time Display Function

When you turn On the Job Duration Display in the Additional Functions, the display shows the copy waiting
time depending on the selected copy mode.
NOTE
• The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different
Size Originals, Rotate Collating and Rotate Grouping modes, or when the copy waiting time is less than
one minute. (See “Setting the Job Duration Display,” on p. 6-39.)
48 Other Useful Functions

Paper Supply Indicator Function

This function shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer when selecting the paper source
(see “Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select),” on p. 2-9, “Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Se-
lect),” on p. 4-61) or when paper in one paper drawer has run out during printing. There are four different
indicators as shown below.
Display Remaining paper

Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.
Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.
Paper drawer is less than approximately 10% full.
Paper drawer is empty.
Paper
Supply
indicator
Display when selecting paper Display when paper has run out
Paper Output
When scanning and printing one original, and when printing on free-size paper or other available paper set in
the stack bypass, the papers are output face up. In other cases, papers are output face down in page order.
For details of other available papers, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-17.
Other Useful Functions 49

Before You Start Using This

Machine
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine.
1
CH APTER

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
External View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-1
Parts and Their Functions

External View
Control panel
(See “Control Panel Parts and Functions,” on p. 1-4.)
Original supply tray
Feeder
Original output area
Stack bypass
Feeds transparencies and
non-standard size paper stock.
(See “Making Copies Using the
Stack Bypass,” on p. 2-12.)
1
Main power switch

Press to the “I” side to turn the
power ON.
(See “Main Power and Control
Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.)
Right cover
Open this cover when clearing
a paper jam.
(See “Removing Paper Jams,”
on p. 8-2.)
Control panel
Paper drawer 3, 4 Original supply tray
Feeder
Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of Original output area
paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). You can adjust the Stack bypass
Main power switch
paper drawer 3 to hold the following standard Right cover
paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR. Paper drawer 3, 4
Paper drawer 1, 2
Paper drawer 1, 2
Each paper drawer holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
1-2 Parts and Their Functions

Internal View
Rear side of platen glass cover

Platen glass
Toner supply cover
1
Front cover
Fixing Transport unit (Unit 1)
Duplexing Transport unit (Unit 2)
Breaker
(See “Periodic Inspection of the
Breaker,” on p. 26.)
Rear side of platen glass cover
Platen glass
Toner supply cover
Front cover
Fixing Transport unit
Duplexing Transport unit
Test button Breaker
Parts and Their Functions 1-3

Feeder
Feeder cover Original supply tray
Feeder cover
Original supply tray
Slide guide
Original set indicator

Lights when originals are
placed on the original
supply tray.
Slide guide Original output area
IMPORTANT
1
• If the paper delivery slot is blocked, printing may not be correctly performed. Therefore, do not place
objects in the original output area.
Control Panel Parts and Functions

1: Counter Check key 6: Numeric keys
2: Display contrast dial 7: Energy Saver key
Touch panel display 8: Control panel power switch
3: COPY key (sub power supply)
9: Stop key
4: MAIL BOX key
5: SCAN key 10: Start key
Counter Energy Saver

Check Display Contrast
COPY MAIL BOX SCAN ON / OFF
Reset
1 2 3 Stop
Guide Start
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
ID 0 C
Processing
/Data Error Power
19: Clear key 20: Main Power indicator

11: Clip holder
18: Error indicator
17: Processing/Data indicator
16: ID key
15: Interrupt key
14: Additional Functions key
13: Guide key
12: Reset key
1-4 Parts and Their Functions

1: Counter Check key The value of the charging counter is displayed in the touch panel.
2: Display contrast Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.
dial
3: COPY key Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic Features screen
appears in the touch panel display.
4: MAIL BOX key Press to use the Mail Box function. The Box selection screen

appears in the touch panel.
5: SCAN key Press when the function is extended.
6: Numeric keys Press to enter numerical values.
7: Energy Saver key Press to place the machine in the Energy Saver mode.
8: Control panel Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When set to OFF, the
power switch machine is in the Sleep mode.
(sub power supply)
9: Stop key Press to temporarily stop a scanning operation or an output

operation of the copy function.
10: Start key Press to start an operation.
1
11: Clip holder Place paper clips here.
12: Reset key Press to return the settings to the Standard mode.
13: Guide key Press to display explanations of modes or functions in the touch
panel display.
14: Additional Press to set additional functions.

Functions key
15: Interrupt key Press to interrupt a continuous copy job when you need to make
priority copies.
16: ID key Press when setting the Department ID Management function.
17: Processing/Data Flashes when this machine is performing operations.

indicator
18: Error indicator Flashes or lights when there is trouble in this machine. When the
indicator flashes, follow the message which appears in the
display. When it lights, contact your service repesentative.
19: Clear key Press to clear incorrectly entered values or characters.
20: Main Power indicator Lights when the main power is turned ON.
Counter Check key
Display contrast dial
COPY key
MAIL BOX key
SCAN key
Numeric keys
Parts and Their Functions 1-5

Main Power and Control Panel Power

The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power
switch.
Turning the Power ON

1 Make sure that the power plug is firmly

inserted into the power outlet, and press the
power switch to ON (“ I ” side).
The main power switch is located on the right side
of the machine. The main power indicator on the
control panel lights when the main power switch is
turned ON.
WARNING
• Never remove or insert the power plug with wet
1
hands. This can cause electrical shock.

IMPORTANT
• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least three
seconds before turning the main power back ON.
• If the main power indicator on the control panel
does not light even though the main power switch is
ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF.
(See “When the Power does not Turn ON,” on p. 8-
36.)
NOTE
• When turning OFF the main power, press the main
power switch to the “ ” side.
The screen on the right is displayed until the
machine becomes ready to scan.
1-6 Main Power and Control Panel Power

The screen on the right is displayed when the

machine becomes ready to scan.
NOTE
• In this status, jobs can be reserved. (See
“Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming
Up,” on p. 5-5.)

2 The machine becomes ready to print after
about 5 minutes. (at a room temperature of
68°F).
Standard mode is set in the touch panel.
IMPORTANT
• If you scan originals while the machine is warming
up, it will take longer than the time mentioned
above for the machine to become ready to print.
NOTE
1
• The standard copy settings are as follows:
- Copy ratio: Direct (100%)
- Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy exposure: Auto Exposure Control
- Copy quantity: 1
- Copy function: 1→1-sided copy
• You can change the standard copy settings.
(See “Changing the Current Standard Settings,”
on p. 6-42.)
• You can choose which functions to display in the
Basic Features screen according to the Additional
Functions settings. (See “Selecting the Initial Func-
tion at Power ON,” on p. 6-6.)
If the message “You must insert a control card.”
appears, insert a control card. (See
“Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box
Functions,” on p. 10-3.)
Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-7

If the message “Enter the Department ID and

Password using the numeric keys.” appears,
enter the Department ID and Password. (See
“Operations after Turning the Power ON,” on
p. 10-4.)
Control Panel Power Switch

Press the control panel power switch to cancel the
Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations.
NOTE
• The machine can receive documents from a per-
sonal computer, and print them out even in the
Sleep mode.
1
1-8 Main Power and Control Panel Power

Using the Touch Panel Display

Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display
The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently.
Cancel Key key Press to close the current setting screen, retaining the programmed settings in the

Next Key
Back Key Additional Functions screen.
Done Key
OK key
Press to cancel the function (mode) that is either being set or has already been set
Special
Key
Features in screens other than the Additional Functions screen.
key Press to set the function (mode) and proceed to the next setting procedure.
key Press to go back to the previous procedure, saving the setting already set, when
setting a function (mode).
key Press to close the present screen.
key Press to decide the setting of a function (mode).
key The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set
1
their functions.
Using the Touch Panel Display 1-9

Touch Panel Key Display

When you press a key displayed on the screen, the key is highlighted and the corresponding
function (mode) is set. Some keys may not be highlighted even when that function (mode) is set.
CAUTION
• Press the touch panel keys gently with a finger. Do not press the touch panel with a pencil, ball-
point pen, or other sharp objects. Such sharp objects can scratch the surface of the touch panel
or break it.
NOTE
• Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective film from the display.
When you set a certain function (mode), the characters on some keys may become difficult to see.
You cannot press these keys displayed in this way, which means that you cannot set these functions
in combination with the presently set function (mode).
Presently set function

Functions that cannot be set in combination
with the presently set function
Functions that can be set in combination

with the presently set function
1
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel

If the touch panel display is hard to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to adjust
the brightness.
To make the touch panel brighter, turn the dial

counter-clockwise. To make it darker, turn the
dial clockwise.
1-10 Using the Touch Panel Display

Placing Originals
Set the originals in one of the following places, depending on the size and type that you want to print
and the settings that you have programed.
● Platen glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy paper,
lightweight paper, and transparencies.

● Feeder
Start
Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically
scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned
as two-sided image data.
NOTE
• If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, set the Job Build mode. (See
“Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45, and “Scanning Originals Separately Set as
One Document (Job Build),” on p. 4-45.)
Placing Originals 1-11

Orientation of Originals
You can place originals vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the
back edge of the platen glass or the feeder.
NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, prints may not be made
correctly depending on the mode you have set.
• LTR/ STMT-size originals can be placed vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for hori-
zontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that for vertically placed originals. You can place origi-
nals horizontally when printing with Preset Zoom mode, such as LTR→11"x17". (Horizontally placed LTR/
STMT-size originals are referred to as “LTRR/ STMTR”.)
• 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals must be placed horizontally.
[Platen glass]
Place the original

face down.
1
Place the original

face down.
Vertical placement Horizontal placement
[Feeder]
ABC ABC
Vertical placement Horizontal placement
1-12 Placing Originals

Placing an Original on the Platen Glass

You should use the platen glass when scanning books, originals on heavy or lightweight paper,
transparencies etc., into memory.
1 Lift up the feeder.
IMPORTANT

• Lift up the feeder about 11-7/8" (30 cm), so that the
S-shaped sensor detaches from the feeder. Other-
wise, the size of originals may not be detected cor-
rectly.
• Return the original supply tray to its original posi-

tion if the original supply tray is pulled up.
1
2 Place your original.
The surface that you want to scan into memory
must be placed face down. Align the corner of the
original with the top left corner of the platen glass.
NOTE
• Place books and other bound originals on the
platen glass in the same way.
• When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to
11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place the original hori-
zontally on the platen glass and align it with the
LTRR or STMTR marks.
• When copying STMT-size original using the platen
glass, you need to set the “LTRR/STMT Original
Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distin-
guishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on
p. 6-16.)

3 Gently lower the feeder.
CAUTION
• Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your
hand, as this may result in personal injury.
• Do not press down the feeder hard when using
the platen glass to scan thick books. This may
damage the platen glass and cause personal

injury.
NOTE
• When placing originals on the platen glass, the size
of the original is detected after the feeder has been
lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before copy-
ing.
• Postcards cannot be detected. Follow the instruc-
tions on the display which appears after pressing
Start
the key and specify the original size, or select
the paper manually.
1
• Remove the original from the platen glass when

scanning is completed.

Placing Originals in the Feeder

Start
Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically scans
them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided image data.
You can place the following originals in the original supply tray:
• Weight : 13 to 32-lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
• Size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT
• Tray capacity : 100 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

IMPORTANT
• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon-backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. Originals which have
been fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not be fed smoothly.
• If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written with pencil, perform the Feeder Cleaning.
(See “Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning),” on p. 8-30.)
NOTE
• Place the original as far as it will go until the original set indicator is lit.
1
1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of the
originals.

2 Neatly place your originals face up in the origi-

nal supply tray.
IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while the originals
are being scanned.
NOTE
• When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to

11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place your originals hori-
zontally.
• You can place different-size originals (i.e. LTR and
11"x17", STMT and LTRR) together in one group
in the feeder when you set the Different Size Orig-
inals mode. (See “Feeding Different-size Origi-
nals Together in the Feeder (Different Size
Originals),” on p. 3-43.)
• The scanned originals are output face down to the
original output area.
When scanning is completed, remove the original
sequentially from the original output area to avoid
paper jams.
1

Available Paper Stock

Paper types available for this machine are as follows:
When you store the paper type loaded in the paper drawers of this machine, the type of paper
which can be set is indicated by the icons. (See “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,”
on p. 6-12.)

Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)
Paper Type Paper drawer 1, 2 Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass Paper Deck
1
Plain *
2
Heavy *
1
Recycled *
1
Color *
3
Letterhead * *4
Tracing Paper
Transparency
Labels
1
1
3-Hole Punch* *4 *5
1
Bond *
IMPORTANT
*1 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch papers are from 17-lb to 24-lb bond (64 g/m 2 to
90 g/m2).
*2 Heavy paper is from 25-lb bond to 110-lb index (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2).
*3 Pre-printed papers with logos or patterns.
*4 When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch papers, we recommend that you set the Image Orienta-
tion Priority to “On” in the Additional Functions. (See “Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off,” on
p. 6-38.)
*5 The 3-Hole Punch papers can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the papers with the holes on the left side
when loading in the paper drawers. When loading in the stack bypass or the paper deck, set the papers
with the holes on the right side.
Available Paper Stock 1-17

Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)

Paper Size Length x Width Paper drawer 1, 2 Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass Paper Deck
11"x17" 11" x 17"
LGL 8-1/2" x 14"
LTR 11" x 8-1/2"
LTRR 8-1/2" x 11"
STMTR 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

(4" x 5-7/8" to
Free Size 11-5/8" x 17")
NOTE
• For details on how to load paper, see the following pages:
- Paper drawer 1 to 4: Loading Paper (See p. 7-2.)
- Paper Deck: Loading Paper in the Paper Deck (See p. 9-4.)
- Stack bypass: Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass (See p. 2-12.)
1
1-18 Available Paper Stock

Basic Copying
This chapter describes the basic copy functions.
2
CH APTER
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Basic Copying
Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Stop
Canceling with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Manual Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper
Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut
(Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes
(Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y
Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Selecting Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . 2-45
2-1
2. Basic Copying
Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel) . . . . . . .2-57
Basic Copying
2
2-2
Flow of Copy Operations

This section describes the flow of basic copy operations.
NOTE
• For details on the following items, see the indicated pages.
- Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.)
- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.)
- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
Basic Copying
Press the COPY key.
y Contrast
COPY MAIL BOX SC
2
NOTE
• If the message “You must insert a control card.”
appears, insert a Control Card. (See “Opera-
tions before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,”
on p. 10-3.)
• If the message “Enter the Department ID and Pass-

word using the numeric keys.” appears, enter the
Department ID and Password. (See “Operations
after Turning the Power ON,” on p. 10-4.)
Flow of Copy Operations 2-3

2 Place your originals.

(See “Placing Originals,” on p. 1-11.)
NOTE
• When Auto Collate is set to “On”, the Collate mode
or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at
the point when you place the originals in the
feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off,”
on p. 6-37.)
Basic Copying
3 Set the copy mode in the Basic Features

screen.
(See Chapter 2 “Basic Copying”.)
2
NOTE
• In the Basic Features screen, you can select the
copy paper size, set exposure, image quality, copy
ratio, and two-sided mode, and select the desired
collating function.
4 Set the copy mode in the Special Features

screen.
You can continue setting other available modes.
(See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions”.)
NOTE
• The Special Features screen is divided into two
screens. Press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key to select the
desired mode.
5 Enter the copy quantity.

Reset
(See “Entering the Copy Quantity,” on p. 2-36.) 1 2 3
Guide Start
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
ID 0 C
2-4 Flow of Copy Operations

6 Press the
Start
key.
If there is a current job, the machine scans the 3 Stop
original, then waits to print it. Start
Printing starts when the current job is completed. 6
IMPORTANT 9
• You cannot change copy settings such as the copy Clear
quantity, copy paper size and copy ratio during C

copying.
NOTE
Basic Copying
• When scanning is completed, remove the original.
● When the screen on the right appears:
Start
Press the key once for each original. When
scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
2
● When you want to copy a different original while
copying:
You can set the next job while copying. (See
“Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing
(Reserve Copy),” on p. 5-7.)
● When you want to stop copy job before it is

Stop
completed, press the key. (See “Canceling ON / OFF
a Copy Job,” on p. 2-7.)

NOTE
Stop Stop
• After you have pressed the key, several copies
Start
may be output from the machine.
• You can stop copy job in the System Monitor
screen. (See “Checking and Changing Printing
Status,” on p. 5-13.)
ar
Flow of Copy Operations 2-5

● When you want to interrupt a copy job: 1 2 3

To interrupt a copy job when you need to make Guide
priority copies, press the

Interrupt
key. (See “Inter- ? 4 5 6
rupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies Additional Functions
(Interrupt Mode),” on p. 5-3.) 7 8 9

Interrupt Clea
ID 0 C
Processing
/Data Error
Basic Copying
7 When the copy has been made, remove it from

the tray.
NOTE
• If the optional Control Card is attached, remove the
Control Card. (See “Operations after Using Copy or
2
Mail Box Functions,” on p. 10-3.)
• If you have set Department ID Management, press 1 2 3

the ID key. (See “Operations after Using Copy Guide
Functions,” on p. 10-5.) ? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
ID 0 C
Processing
/Data Error
2-6 Flow of Copy Operations

Canceling a Copy Job

NOTE
• You can also cancel the copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See “Checking and Changing Print-
ing Status,” on p. 5-13.)
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display
Basic Copying
1 Press the [Cancel] key on the right screen
which appears while the machine is waiting to
print the document.
The machine stops copying.
2
NOTE
• When you canceled a job during scanning, remove
the original of that job.
Stop
Canceling with the Key
1 Press the Stop

key.
ON / OFF
NOTE
• When canceling a job which is being printed, press
the [Cancel] key on the touch panel which appears
3 Stop
during printing.
Start
6
9
Clear
C
2 Select the job you want to cancel from the list,

and press the [Cancel] key.
The selected job is canceled.
NOTE
• To continue the job, press the [Resume Copy] key.
• You cannot cancel multiple jobs.
• When canceling multiple jobs, select and cancel
the jobs in turn.
Canceling a Copy Job 2-7

3 Press the [Resume Copy] key.

Basic Copying
2
2-8 Canceling a Copy Job

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

NOTE
• When copying an original onto the same paper size at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may
be cut slightly on the copy. For details of the size of the non-image areas, see “Non-image areas” in the
“Specifications,” on p. 11-3.
• If you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy
paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy paper
without its periphery being cut off. (See “Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from
Being Cut (Entire Image),” on p. 2-22.)
Basic Copying
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto)
NOTE
• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting.
2
1 Place your originals and press the [Paper
Select] key.
Auto Paper Selection

Paper Select
2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done]

key.
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-9

The screen on the right appears.

Basic Copying
3 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.
IMPORTANT
• In the Automatic Paper Selection mode, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, XY Auto Copy Ratio,
Rotate Collating, Rotate Grouping, Saddle Stitch, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and
Image Repeat (Auto) modes cannot be set.
2
• You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection mode when you set the Different Size Originals mode
in combination with the Shift mode or the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
• You cannot use Automatic Paper Selection when copying the following types of originals. Copy these
using Manual Paper Selection.
- Non-standard size originals
- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- Originals smaller than STMT in size
Manual Paper Selection

You can make copies after selecting the paper size and type (colored paper, recycled paper, etc.)
loaded in the paper drawer.

Select] key.
NOTE
• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting.
2-10 Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

2 Select the desired paper size, and press the

[Done] key.
NOTE
• The paper icon in the display indicates that the
paper is loaded vertically, and the icon indicates
that the paper is loaded horizontally in the paper
drawers. Paper sizes with the suffix “R” (such as
LTRR) indicate paper placed in the paper drawer or
the stack bypass horizontally.
• The paper sizes are displayed in the order in which
Basic Copying
they are loaded in the paper drawers.
• The paper sizes which are loaded in the paper
drawers are shown in the display.
• The type of paper (color, recycled) loaded in the
paper drawers can be indicated by the icons. (See
“Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,”
on p. 6-12.)
2
The display returns to the Basic Features screen,
and the selected paper size is displayed.
NOTE
Reset
• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-11

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

When making copies on transparencies or non-standard size paper stock, place the paper stock in
the stack bypass. The following two kinds of paper can be copied using the stack bypass.
● Standard Size
You can place standard inch paper, and A or B series paper.
● Free Size
You can place non-standard size (4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432
mm)) paper.
Basic Copying
IMPORTANT
• Note the following points when using the stack bypass.
- Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high)
- Paper size: 4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)
- Paper weight: 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
- Curl down paper before use.
2
(Curling amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm.))

There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications but cannot be fed in the
stack bypass.
• Place STMT-size paper horizontally in the stack bypass.
• Do not set different size paper at the same time.
• When you set free-size paper, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, Entire Image, Staple, Hole Punch,
1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Trans-
parency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
NOTE
• When copying the following originals, you cannot use Automatic Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper
Selection with these types of paper.
- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies
1 Open the stack bypass.
NOTE
• If the paper you want to specify is already in the
stack bypass, press the [Paper Select] key, then
specify the desired paper.
• If the paper size loaded in the stack bypass is dif-
ferent from the paper size stored in the Standard
Stack Bypass Settings, press the [StackBypass
Setting] key and change the setting to the loaded
paper size. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for
the Stack bypass,” on p. 6-19.)
• If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the
paper which you want to specify, check whether or
not there is a current job or a reserved job. (See
“Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on
p. 5-13.)
- If there is a current/ reserved job, reserve a change
for the stack bypass. (See “Using the Stack Bypass
while Reserving Print Jobs,” on p. 5-10.)
2-12 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

2 Adjust the slide guides to the size of the paper.
Basic Copying
Slide Guide
When feeding large-size paper, pull out the

auxiliary tray.
2
Auxiliary tray
3 Place the paper in the stack bypass.

Align the required number of sheets of paper with
the slide guides. The surface that you want to
copy on (opened surface) must be placed face up.
Insert the paper into the machine until it stops.
The screen of step 4 appears in the display.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does
not exceed the limit mark.
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-13

4 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.
IMPORTANT
• Set the paper size to the same size as the paper
placed on the stack bypass.
• When placing paper other than a standard size,
press the [Free Size] key.
NOTE
• To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-
size] key.
Basic Copying
If the screen on the right is displayed, adjust the

width of the slide guides to match the paper size.
2
5 Select the type of paper (Plain, Heavy, etc.),

and press the [OK] key.
IMPORTANT
• Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam.
NOTE
• For details of paper types, see “Available Paper
Stock,” on p. 1-17.
2-14 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

6 Press the [Done] key.

Paper size loaded
presently
NOTE
• When you press the [StackBypass Setting] key, you Paper size
can set the paper size again. (See “Using the Stack selected
Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs,” on p. 5-10.
Basic Copying
2
7 Place your originals and program the copy set-
tings.
NOTE
• When there is no reserved job, continue the proce-
dure from step 2.
NOTE
Reset
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-15

Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset
Zoom)
You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to standard paper size.
● [Reduce] ● [Enlarge]
LGL → LTR (78 %) Maximum ratio* (400%)
11"x17" → LGL, 11"x15" → LTR (73 %) STMT → 11"x17" (200 %)
Basic Copying
11"x17" → LTR (64 %) LTR → 11"x17" (129 %)

11"x17" → STMT (50 %) LGL → 11"x17" (121 %)
Minimum ratio (25%) *Only on the platen glass
IMPORTANT
• Place your originals horizontally in following cases:
2
- When enlarging LTR-size originals to 11"x17"/ LGL-size paper.

- When enlarging STMT-size originals to11"x17"-size paper.
• When reducing 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals to LTR-size with Image Orientation Priority set to “Off”, select
LTRR-size paper.
NOTE
• Placing an original horizontally means setting with the longer side of the original sideways.

Select] key.
NOTE
Copy Ratio
• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting. Preset Zoom
2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done]

key.
2-16 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

3 Press the [Copy Ratio] key.
Basic Copying
4 To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge,
select an enlargement ratio.
2

and the selected copy ratio is displayed.
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2-17

NOTE
• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.
Reset
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)

You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments.
Basic Copying
The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and
from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.
Original Copy
CITY
2
CITY Zoom Designation CITY

CITY
1 Place your originals and press the [Copy

Ratio] key.
2 Enter the copy ratio with the [–] or [+] key or

the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) in 1% increments.
NOTE
• Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys
( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values with
the [–] and [+] keys.
• If you make a mistake when entering values, press
Clear
the C key, and enter the correct value.

NOTE
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter the appropriate
value will appear on the screen.
Basic Copying
2
NOTE
Reset

Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original

and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto)
The machine automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the originals and
the selected paper.
Original Copy
Basic Copying
Auto
2
IMPORTANT
• You cannot use the Auto mode with Automatic Paper Selection.
• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset
Zoom or Zoom Designation modes.
• To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.
NOTE
• If an error occurs between the Auto copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom
Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print
Image Occur,” on p. 6-31.)
• The paper sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However,
when copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the “LTRR/STMT Original
Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on
p. 6-16.)

Select] key.

2 Select the paper size, and press the [Done]

key.
NOTE
• Select a paper size other than “Auto”. When you
select the [Auto] key, the paper loaded in the paper
drawer 1 will be selected.
Basic Copying
2
4 Press the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Auto] keys in that order.
Reset
• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
• If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro-
vided that the original size can be detected.
Start
• If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed.
• The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.

Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery

from Being Cut (Entire Image)
When copying an original onto the same size of paper at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the
original may be cut slightly on the copy.
However, if you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based
on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire image is reproduced on the copy
without its periphery being cut off.
IMPORTANT
• In the Entire Image mode, combined use with the Booklet, Frame Erase, Image Combination, Image Sep-
Basic Copying
aration, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

Ratio] key.
2
Entire Image
2 Press the [Entire Image] key, and press the

[Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Entire Image] keys in that order.
Reset

Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy

Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)
You can change the copy ratio by specifying the original size and paper size in inches. The following
two Zoom Program modes are available.
● Making copies with the same XY copy ratio (Zoom)
Designate the same copy ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions.
Original Copy
Basic Copying
Zoom Program
2
X=4" (100 mm) X=5-7/8" (150 mm)
● Making copies with different XY copy ratios (XY Zoom)

Designate different copy ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions.
Original Copy
Y=4-3/4" (120 mm) Y=5-1/2" (140 mm)
X=4" (100 mm) X=3-1/8" (80 mm)
NOTE
• The designated sizes are converted to the copy ratio (%) as follows:
- copy ratio (%) = (copy size ÷ original size) x 100

Making Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom)

Ratio] key.
Zoom
Basic Copying
2 Press the [Other Zoom] key.

2
3 Press the [Zoom Program] key.

4 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the

original size, then press the [Copy Size] key
and enter the copy size. Then press the [OK]
key.
NOTE
• When entering values in millimeters, you can use
Clear
the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the
control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the values
Basic Copying
again.
• If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the
[mm] key.
• For details on how to enter the values in inches,
see “Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.
• To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction
2
(X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently,
press the [XY Zoom] key.
• If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message tell-
ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will
appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling
you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will
appear.
NOTE
• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.
• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Reset
Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom)

Ratio] key.
XY Zoom


Basic Copying

2
4 Press the [XY Zoom] key.

5 Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and the

[Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the origi-
nal size and the copy size, and enter each
value for X and Y.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-
Basic Copying
rect values.
[mm] key.
• To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press
2
the [Zoom] key.
appear.
6 Enter all the values, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
order.
Reset

Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Indepen-

dently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)
If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can make enlarged or reduced copies with different XY copy
ratios.
The following two XY Zoom modes are available.
● Manually specifying the copy ratio (XY Zoom)
You can manually specify the XY copy ratios in 1% increments.
Basic Copying
Original Copy
Enlarging and reducing with

different XY copy ratios
2
Y=80%
X=120%
NOTE
• If you set the copy ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the copy image computed from the original size, copy
ratio etc., is automatically rotated and copied to match the paper.

● Automatically specifying the copy ratio (Auto XY Zoom)

The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper.
Original Copy
LTRR selected
Auto XY Zoom
Basic Copying
LTRR
LTR
2
IMPORTANT
• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To
make copies, specify the copy ratio.
NOTE
• If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size by Manual Paper Selection. If you do not select
the paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper set in a certain paper drawer.
• If you specify a magnification of smaller than 25%, a message telling you to set it to 25% will appear. If it
is larger than 400%, a message telling you to set it to 400% will appear.
• If an error occurs between the Auto XY Zoom copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with
the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and
Print Image Occur,” on p. 6-31.)
• When you set the copy ratio in Auto XY Zoom mode, the Auto Orientation will not be performed.

Ratio] key.


Basic Copying

2
4 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each

value for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• If you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key, select a paper
size other than the “Auto”. If you select the “Auto”,
the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the
paper in a certain paper drawer.
• You can enter the value using the Numeric keys
( 0 - 9 ) on the control panel.
the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-
rect values.
• Even if you entered the copy ratio with the Numeric
keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values
with the [–] and [+] keys.


NOTE
• When you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key in the fol-
Basic Copying
lowing cases, X: Auto% and Y: Auto% are displayed
as the copy ratios on the Basic Features screen.
- When the original is placed in the feeder.
- When the original whose size cannot be detected
is placed on the platen glass.
2
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)

You can adjust the exposure and image quality when scanning the original you want to copy.
NOTE
• You can also change the exposure during printing. (See “Changing the Exposure During Printing,” on
p. 5-2.)
Adjusting Copy Exposure

Basic Copying
You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
1 Place your originals and press the [Light] or

[Dark] key.
2
NOTE
• Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] Copy Exposure
Dark
keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to Light
the right to make the exposure darker.
NOTE
Reset
2-32 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)

Selecting Image Quality

You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The
following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.
Text mode Text/Photo mode Photo mode
The world’s coral reefs, where The world’s coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored fish and a
Text of other tropical creatures
myriad myriad of other tropical creatures
Text/Photo come together.
come together. Aptly nicknamed Printed Img.
Photo Forests under the sea”,
“Tropical
these spots of breathtaking
Basic Copying
beauty serve as home to
countless varieties of life, and to
us of the land, this alluring,
dream-like world forms a tropical
paradise filled with romance.
2
● Text mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals
can be copied clearly.
● Text/Photo mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from originals containing both text and photos.
● Photo mode
This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).
IMPORTANT
• If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo
mode, moiré may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode.
(See “Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness),” on p. 3-67.)
• Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set
mode is canceled.
NOTE
• When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can be adjusted only by Man-
ual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be selected.
• When the “Photo Mode” of Copy Settings is “On”, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the
[ ] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function,” on p. 6-41.)
• If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the
most appropriate level.
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-33

1 Place your original and press the [ ] key.

Basic Copying
2 Select the type of original (Text, Text/Photo,

Photo).
2
When the “Photo Mode” of Copy Settings is set to

“On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo]
key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy
Function,” on p. 6-41.)
3 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the

copy exposure.
NOTE
• Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark]
keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to
2-34 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.
Reset
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality
Basic Copying
Place your originals and press the [A] key.
The exposure is automatically adjusted to the
level best suited to the quality of the original.
A
NOTE
• If the original is a transparency, you may not be
2
able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so,
adjust the exposure using Manual Exposure Con-
trol.
NOTE
Reset
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-35

Entering the Copy Quantity

Specifying the Required Number of Copies
NOTE
• Up to 999 copies can be set. The maximum number of copies can also be changed. For details, contact
your service representative.
1 Press the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) to enter the

Basic Copying
desired copy quantity (1 to 999). Reset

1 2 3
IMPORTANT Guide Start
• You cannot change the copy quantity during copy- ? 4 5 6

ing. Additional Functions
7 8 9
NOTE
2
Interrupt Clear
• The maximum copy quantity varies according to ID 0 C
the copy job settings.
• The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of

the touch panel display.
2-36 Entering the Copy Quantity

Changing the Copy Quantity

Clear
1 Press the C key to clear the entered number. 1 2 3 Stop
Guide Start
Then press the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) to enter the ? 4 5 6
copy quantity again (1 to 999).
nal Functions
7 8 9
IMPORTANT nterrupt Clear
• You cannot change the copy quantity during copy- ID 0 C
ing.
Basic Copying
Processing Power
/Data Error
NOTE
• The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of
the touch panel display.
Entering the Copy Quantity 2-37

Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)

IMPORTANT
• In the Two-sided Mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving,
Image Combination, and Image Separation modes cannot be set.
• In the Book 2-Sided mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Binding Erase, Different Size
Originals, and Image Repeat modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.
• Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided copies.
NOTE
• When copying with Two-sided Mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen
Basic Copying
glass or the feeder.

• The Two-sided Mode that you have set is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key in the Basic Features
screen.
• Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
- Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
- Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
2
There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to make
two-sided copies.
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided)

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals.
Original Copy
12-Sided
Two-sided Mode
IMPORTANT
• Place the original horizontally when copying originals such as LTRR/ STMTR-size originals. If these origi-
nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
NOTE
• If there are an odd number of originals, the back of the last print is left blank. (The machine’s counter does
not count the blank page as a copy.)
• When combined with Different Size Originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized
originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes. When wanting to make copies on
both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the paper size you want to print
on, before printing.
2-38 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)

1 Place your originals and press the [Two-sided

Mode] key.
Basic Copying
2 Press the [1 2-Sided] key.
2
● When you select the [Option] key:
Select the type of two-sided orientation, and
press the [Done] key.
3 Press the [OK] key.
Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) 2-39


and “1 2-Sided” is displayed above the [Two-sided
Mode] key.
Basic Copying
NOTE
• When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and
Start
press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
2
Reset
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-

Sided)
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make two-sided
copies.
Original Copy
22-Sided

1 Place your originals in the feeder and press

the [Two-sided Mode] key.
NOTE
on p. 6-37.)
Basic Copying
2
Select the type of two-sided orientation for origi-
nal and copy paper, and press the [Done] key.


Basic Copying

Mode] key.
2
NOTE
Start
Reset

Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-

Sided)
This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided
copies.
Original Copy
21-Sided
Basic Copying
2
IMPORTANT
• Place the original horizontally when copying original such as LTRR/ STMTR-size original. If these origi-
nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
NOTE
• When copying two-sided original placed on the platen glass on one side of different sheets, set the Job
Build mode. (See “Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45.)

the [Two-sided Mode] key.
NOTE
on p. 6-37.)

● When you press the [Option] key:

Select the type of original, and press the [Done]
key.
Basic Copying

2

Mode] key.
NOTE
Reset

Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book

(Book 2-Sided)
This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages or front and back sides of a
page in a bound original, such as a book or a magazine.
● Left/Right Two-sided
Original Copy
1
2
Basic Copying
Book 2-Sided
2
1 2
● Front/Back Two-sided
Original Copy
1 2
2 1
IMPORTANT
• Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the
Book 2-Sided mode.
• When using this feature, select LTR-size paper.
• When copying with Front/Back Two-sided, the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of
the last two-sided page are left blank. The machine’s counter does not count the blank page as a copy.


press the [Two-sided Mode] key.
NOTE
copying from the first page and work your way for-
ward.
• Place the original face down so that its top edge is
aligned with the back edge of the platen glass.
Basic Copying
2 Press the [Book 2-Sided] key, and press the

[Next] key.
2
3 Select the type of layout, and press the [OK]

key.
NOTE
• If you select the [Left/Right Two-sided] key, the fac-
ing pages are copied onto the front and back sides
of a single sheet.
• If you select the [Front/Back Two-sided] key, the
front and back sides of the left page, or the front
and back sides of the right page are copied onto
the front and back sides of a single sheet.
The display returns to the Basic Features screen
and “Book 2-Sided” is displayed above the [Two-
sided Mode] key.


To scan the next two facing pages, place the
Start
original and press the key again.
When scanning is completed, press the [Done]
key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode]
and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the
Basic Copying
key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)

Collating Copies (Finisher)

The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the copies in various ways by pages or copy sets. The
copied papers are output face down.
● When “Collate” is set:

Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and output onto the trays as
follows.
Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3

Basic Copying
Three sets of
copies specified
Collate
Finisher
1 1 1 1
2
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
● When “Group” is set:

All copies of the same original page are automatically collated and grouped together, and output
onto the trays as follows.
Grouped Grouped Grouped Grouped

Originals copies of page 1 copies of page 2 copies of page 3 copies of page 4
Three sets of
copies specified
Group
1 1 2 3 4
2 1 2 3 4
3 1 2 3 4
4
● When “Staple” is set:

Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, output onto the trays as
shown below, and then automatically stapled.
When you select the [Corner] (TopLeft) key:

Three sets of
copies specified
Staple
1
2 1 1 1
3
4
2-48 Collating Copies (Finisher)

When you select the [Double] (Left) key:

Three sets of
copies specified
Staple
1
2 1 1 1
3
4
Basic Copying
When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

Three sets of
copies specified
2
2
7
8 1
8 1 8 1 8 1
4
5
6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3
IMPORTANT
• [Staple] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).
• You cannot set the Staple mode when copying on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole
punch.
• [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.
• Paper sizes which can be saddle stitched are 11"x17"/ LTRR.
• The maximum number of sheets that can be bound at a time is 15.
NOTE
• Place the originals to be finished into a booklet as shown in the illustration above. (See “Making Copies
for Use as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 3-9.)
• [Saddle Stitch] can only be set when the 1 2-Sided or 2 2-Sided mode is selected. (See “Two-sided
Copying (Two-sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)
● When “Non-collate” is set (none of the above (Collate, Group or Staple) are set):
Originals Copies
Non-collate
1
1
2 2
3
4
3
Collating Copies (Finisher) 2-49

● When “Hole Punch” is set:

Punches 2 or 3 holes in the copied sheets.
When you select 11"x17"/ LTR-size paper:
Original Copy
Hole Punch
1
2 1
3
4
Basic Copying
IMPORTANT
• [Hole Punch] can only be specified when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.
• The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper
size.
- 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR
- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR
2
• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.
● When “Rotate” is set:

When originals of the same size are placed, the pages are aligned and the copy sets are deliv-
ered in alternating directions.
Original Copy
Rotate
1
1
1
2 1
3
4
IMPORTANT
• You can only select LTR/ LTRR-size paper.
• [Rotate] can only be specified when the machine is not equipped with the Finisher (option).
● When “Offset” is set:

Copies are shifted to the front and back respectively.
Original Copy
Rotate
1
1
2 1 1
3
4
IMPORTANT
• [Offset] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).
• You cannot select STMTR-size paper.


the [Finisher] key.
NOTE
• When Auto Collate is set to “On”, the Offset Collate
mode is automatically set at the point when you
place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting
Automatic Collate On/ Off,” on p. 6-37.)
Basic Copying
2 Select the desired collate feature, and press
the [OK] key.
NOTE
2
• When you select the [Staple] key, press the [Next]
key.
• The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is attached.
• The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is not attached.
• The [Hole Punch] key only appears when a
Puncher Unit-B1 is attached to the Finisher. When the Finisher is attached.
• The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher
● When you select the [Staple] key:
Select the type of stapling ([Corner], [Double],
[Saddle Stitch]) and the position to be stapled,
IMPORTANT
• The maximum number of papers which can be
stapled at a time is as follows:
- 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets
- LTR : 50 sheets When the Finisher is not attached.
■ When you select the [Corner] key:

Select the staple position, and press the [OK]
key.
IMPORTANT
• STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.

■ When you select the [Double] key:

key.
IMPORTANT
• LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be double-
stapled.
■ When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

Basic Copying
Press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT
• [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the
Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.
• LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be saddle
stitched.
2
NOTE
• You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See
“Changing the Saddle Stitch Position,” on p. 6-33.)
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
● When you select the [Rotate] key:

When the Automatic Paper Selection is set,
press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or
LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key
in the following cases:
- Available paper size is selected manually.
- Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal
and vertical direction.
- Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper draw-
ers loaded with available paper size is set to “On”.

● When you select the [Hole Punch] key:

Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed
sheets.
IMPORTANT
• The machine automatically selects the type of hole
punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected
paper size.
- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR
• You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.
Basic Copying
The display returns to the Basic Features
screen and the selected feature is displayed
above the [Finisher] key.
2
When the Offset Collate is set.
NOTE
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)

Before making multiple copies, the copying result can be checked using the Sample Set mode.
NOTE
• The machine’s counter counts the sample print as a print.
1 Place your originals and program the copy set-

tings.
Basic Copying
NOTE Sample Set

• The [Sample Set] key is displayed when you set a
multiple number of copy sets in the Collate, Staple
or Cover/Sheet Insertion modes. This key is not
displayed when you set the Group mode.
2
2 Press the [Sample Set] key, then press the

Start
key.
Sample Set copying starts and one copy set is

made.
2-54 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)

3 Check the output sheet, and select the [Start

Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key.
NOTE
• To make the remaining copies, press the [Start
Print] key.
• To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key.
• To change copy settings, press the [Change Set-
tings] key.
Basic Copying
● When you select the [Change Settings] key:
Change the settings, and press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To change the number of copies, use the Numeric
keys ( 0 - 9 ).
2
• To change the exposure, press the [Light] or [Dark]
key.
• To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]
key.
• To select the copy paper, press the [Paper Select]
key. (See “Selecting the Copy Paper Size
(Paper Select),” on p. 2-9.)
• To collate the copied papers, press the [Finisher]
key. (See “Collating Copies (Finisher),” on p.
2-48.)
• To set a margin for binding, press the [Margin]
key. (See “Making Copies with Margins (Mar-
gin),” on p. 3-21.)
• When you change the copy settings, the machine
starts printing from the first set.
● To copy another sample set, press the [Sample

Set] key.
Sample set copying starts and one copy set is
made.
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) 2-55

Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation)

When the copy mode settings are selected on the Special Features screen etc., you can check the
current settings.
1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the

Basic Features screen.
The display shows the selected copy mode Setting Confirmation
settings.
Basic Copying
2
2 Check the settings, then press the [Done] key.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
NOTE
• When ten or more copy modes have been set, use
the [ ▼] key to bring up the next screen. To return to
the previous screen, press the [ ▲] key.
• The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those
keys have another screen to set their functions.
2-56 Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation)

Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode

(Setting Confirmation/Cancel)
From the Setting Confirmation screen, you can also change or cancel selected functions.
1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the

The display shows the selected copy mode
settings.
Basic Copying
2
2 Press the key for the copy mode you want to
change or cancel.
The copy mode settings screen appears.
NOTE
• When ten or more copy modes have been set, use
the [ ▼] key to bring up the next screen. To return to
the previous screen, press the [ ▲] key.
• The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those
keys have another screen to set their functions.
• Keys which do not have the [ ] mark on the bot-
tom right can be canceled by pressing the keys
again.
● To change a mode (example: Sharpness)
Perform the same steps as when setting the
mode. Change the setting as you desire, then
press the [OK] key.
The display returns to the Setting Confirmation
screen.
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel) 2-57

● To cancel a mode
Press the [Cancel] key.
The display returns to the Setting Confirmation
screen.
Basic Copying

2
2-58 Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel)


This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
3
CH APTER
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets
(Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies
(Transparency Interleaving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet
(Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a
Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . 3-43
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Storing a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-1
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate

Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)
This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper.
Original Copy
1 1
Two-page Separation
IMPORTANT
• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet,
Transparency Interleaving, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separa-
tion, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Two-
page Separation mode.
• When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See
3
“Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided),” on p. 2-45.)

press the [Special Features] key.
NOTE
copying from the first pages and work your way
forward.
• Place the original face down with the original’s top
edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.
3-2 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy
Sheets (Two-page Separation)


Start

For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again.
When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Two-page Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Reset
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy 3-3
Sheets (Two-page Separation)
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets

and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)
This function enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, inser-
tion sheets or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main
text. In addition, the front and back covers and insertion sheets can also be copied.
IMPORTANT
• In the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, combined use with the Group, Offset Group, Memory Collating, Mem-
ory Grouping, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combina-
tion, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30
sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).
NOTE
• When copying on the front and back covers/ insertion sheets, those sheets are included in the count of
the total number of copies.

• Chapter pages are included in the count of the total number of copies.
● Front Cover
Adds a front cover sheet to each set of copies. The cover sheet can also be copied.
Originals Copy
REPORT REPORT
3
Cover/Sheet Insertion
Printed front cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
● Back Cover
Adds a back cover sheet to each set of copies. The back cover can also be copied.
Originals Copy
REPORT REPORT
Printed back cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
3-4 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to
Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)
● Sheet Insertion
Adds insertion sheets between the pages of copy sets. It is useful when you want to divide your
copy sets into different sections with a blank sheet. The insertion sheets can also be copied.
Originals Copy
REPORT REPORT

Printed insertion sheets selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
● Chapter Page
Adds chapter pages between the pages of copy sets. Since the chapter page is always copied on
one side, it is useful when you want to divide the copy by chapter.
Originals Copy
REPORT REPORT
3
Printed chapter page selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.

the [Special Features] key.
NOTE
feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off,” on
p. 6-37.)
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to 3-5
2 Press the [Cover/Sheet Insertion] key.
3 Select the Cover/Sheet Insertion feature you

want to use, and press the [Next] key.
When you select only the [Chapter Page] mode,

proceed to step 5. (When you select the [Sheet
Insertion] or [Chapter Page] mode.)
NOTE
• You cannot select the [Sheet Insertion] and [Chap-
ter Page] modes at the same time.
• You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key
again.
3
4 When copying onto the front cover, back cover

or insertion sheet, press the [Printed] key, and
press the [Next] key.
NOTE
• The display will vary depending on the setting in
step 3.
• The chapter page will always be copied only on
one side.
5 Make the following settings depending on the

mode selected.
NOTE
• The display will vary depending on the mode
selected.
● When you select the [Back Cover] key:
Select the side to be copied onto, and press the
[Next] key.

● When you select the [Sheet Insertion (Printed)],
[Chapter Page] key:
Set all positions where the sheet is to be
inserted into the copies, and press the [Next]
key.
Specify the sheet insertion positions with the
3
Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ).
NOTE
• You can insert up to 20 insertion sheets (or chapter
pages).
• If you want to insert 6 or more sheets, use the [ ▼]
or [ ▲] keys to scroll to the insertion positions.
• You cannot specify the sheet insertion position to
the first page. Set the position starting from the
second page.
• To cancel a specific sheet insertion page setting,
press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key and press the desired
Clear
page, then press the C key.
● When you select the Two-sided Mode:

Press the [Option] key.
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to 3-7
Select the side to be copied onto, and press the

[Done] key.
6 Select the paper source for each insertion

sheet, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Select the same paper size for the front and back
cover, insertion sheets (or chapter page.)
selected.
7
3
Press the [Done] key.

NOTE
• When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Cover/Sheet Insertion], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Reset
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

You can copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies can be easily made into
a booklet.
Originals Copy
1
Booklet
2
3
4

2
7
8 1
8 1
4
5
6 3 6 3
5 When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.

6
7
8
3
IMPORTANT
• In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image
Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the
even number pages will be printed upside down.
• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.

NOTE
p. 6-37.)
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-9

2 Press the [Booklet] key.
3 Select the original size, and press the [Next]

key.
NOTE
• To copy two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided
Original] key.
size] key.
3
● When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:

Select the type of the original, and press the
[OK] key.
3-10 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)


Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when
the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
IMPORTANT
• The paper used for the cover page must be the
same size as the other pages.
• The paper used for the main text must be from
17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).
• The paper used for the cover page must not be
heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2).
• When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot
set the paper used for the main text in the stack
bypass.

NOTE
• To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key.
• Place the paper face down for the cover page in the
stack bypass.
• The cover page can only be copied on the front.
• 11"x17"/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
● When you select the [Add Cover] key:
Select the [On] or [Off] key to set whether or not
to copy on the cover, and press the [Next] key.
3
Select the type of paper, and press the [Next]
key.
Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-11

5 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the

booklet, and press the [OK] key.
The display returns to the Special Features
screen.
IMPORTANT
• The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-
dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
• When the number of sheet exceeds 15, the sta-
pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be
output to the tray.
NOTE
• The available number of output load on the booklet
tray in the saddle stitching is as follows:

- Number of sheets Number of load
1- 5 25 sets
6-10 15 sets
11-15 10 sets
• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there
is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.

3
NOTE
• When you set the Booklet mode, the Shift mode is
automatically set.
NOTE
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)
3-12 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved

between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)
Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automat-
ically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. The interleaf sheets protect the cop-
ied surface of the transparencies. They can also either be printed with the same images as the
transparencies or left blank.
● Blank interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode.
Originals Copy
Transparency
REPORT REPORT
Transparency In-

terleaving
Blank interleaf
sheets
● Printed interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode.
3
Originals Copy
Transparency
REPORT REPORT
REPORT
Printed interleaf
sheets
IMPORTANT
• In the Transparency Interleaving mode, combined use with the Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot
be set.
• You cannot make more than one set of copies at a time in the Transparency Interleaving mode.
• Even if your machine is equipped with the Finisher, you cannot use any of the Finisher modes with the
Transparency Interleaving mode.
NOTE
• The machine’s counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies 3-13

(Transparency Interleaving)

NOTE
p. 6-37.)
2 Press the [Transparency Interleaving] key.

3
3 Select the size of the transparencies, and

4 Select the size of interleaf sheet, and press the

[Next] key.
3-14 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies

5 Select whether or not to copy the image onto

the interleaf sheet, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
NOTE
• When copying interleaf sheets, those sheets are
included in the count of the total number of copies.

3
7 Place the transparency in the stack bypass,
and proceed to make copies in the usual way.
(See “Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass,” on
p. 2-12.)
NOTE
• When the original is placed on the platen glass, fol-
low the instructions that appear on the display and
Start
press the key once for each original. When
• In the Transparency Interleaving mode, the trans-
parencies are fed from the stack bypass and the
interleaf sheets are fed from the paper drawer.
• The copies are output with the copied side face
down, with the transparency first, followed by the
interleaf sheet.
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features],
[Transparency Interleaving], and [Cancel] keys in
that order.
Reset
key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies 3-15

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift)

● Center Shift Corner Shift
Makes copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner.
Original Copy with original image Copy with original image

shifted to the center shifted to a corner
Shift
● No Key Entry
Makes copies with entire image shifted to a designated position with the Numeric keys.
Original Copy
4-3/4"(120mm)
4-3/4"(120mm)
3-1/8"(80mm)
3-1/8"(80mm)
3
CITY Move to designated CITY

area copy
NOTE
• In the Shift mode, combined use with the Image Repeat and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• The Shift mode cannot be selected when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with
the Automatic Paper Selection.
3-16 Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift)

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a

Corner
1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea-

tures] key.

2 Press the [Shift] key.
3
3 Press the [Center Shift Corner Shift] key.
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) 3-17

4 Select the shift direction by using the arrow

keys, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
NOTE
• “Shift direction” dose not refer to the direction in
which the original is placed on the platen glass or
in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the
original shifted, if the original document that you
want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in
the center of the copy page. The center position is
the default.

3
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys

tures] key.

2 Press the [Shift] key.
3 Press the [No Key Entry] key.

3
4 Select the shift direction, then enter the value
using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ).
NOTE
• “Shift direction” does not refer to the direction in
which the original is placed on the platen glass or
in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the
original shifted, if the original document that you
want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in
the center of the copy page. The center position is
the default.
• To change an entered value, select the direction
and enter the desired value again.
Clear
the C key on the touch panel, and enter the values
again.
[mm] key.
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) 3-19

E82_Chap03.US Page 20 Tuesday, May 29, 2001 4:02 PM
● Example: To move the image to the left:

Press the [ ] key on the left to enter the value,
NOTE
• Follow the same procedure when shifting to the
right ,upper and lower sides.
● Example: To move the image in a diagonal

direction:
Press the [ ] key on the upper or lower side
3
to enter the value. Next, press the [ ] key on

the right or left side to enter the value, and
press the [OK] key.

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset

Making Copies with Margins (Margin)

This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width
to the left, right, top or bottom to create a margin on print sheets. Use this mode to make copies
ready for placement in ring binders.
Left margin Right margin Top margin Bottom margin

Original selected selected selected selected
Margin

IMPORTANT
• In the Margin mode, combined use with the Booklet, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be
set.
• When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top or bottom by a
selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of
that image will be cut off.
3
tures] key.
2 Press the [Margin] key.
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) 3-21

3 Select the type of margin, and press the [Next]

key.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes
together and copying an original that already has a
margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-sided: Set the margin for the back only.
- 2 2-sided: You do not need to set the margin. Pro-
ceed to make copies in the usual way.
- 2 1-sided: Set the margin for the back only.
• If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes
together and copying an original that does not have
a margin, follow the instructions below:
- 1 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and
back.
back.
back.
● When you select the [Left Margin] or [Right Mar-
gin] key:
Use the [–] and [+] keys to set the margin for the
front and back (0" to 13/16"/ 0 to 20 mm). Then
3
press the [OK] key.
NOTE
[mm] key.
• The default setting is 3/8" (10 mm).
● When you select the [Top Margin] or [Bottom

Margin] key:
Use the [–] and [+] keys to set the margin (1/16"
to 13/16"/ 1 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
3-22 Making Copies with Margins (Margin)



NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Margin], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
Making Copies with Margins (Margin) 3-23

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies

(Frame Erase)
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. The fol-
lowing three Frame Erase features are available.
IMPORTANT
• Combination of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set
mode is canceled.
● Original Frame Erase

Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original
is smaller than the selected paper size.
Also creates a blank border around the edge of the print paper.
IMPORTANT
• In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination,
Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Copy (LTR)
Original Frame
(STMT) Original Frame Erase
Erase mode
3
selected
Copy (LTR)
Original Frame
Erase mode
not selected
3-24 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)
● Book Frame Erase

Erases the dark border as well as center and contour lines that appear when copying facing
pages in a bound original onto a single print paper.
IMPORTANT
• In the Book Frame Erase, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image
Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Copy
Book Frame
Erase selected
Original
Copy

Book Frame Erase
not selected
● Binding Erase
Erases the shadows that appear in copies from binding holes in originals.
IMPORTANT
3
• In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Sepa-
ration, Booklet, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
Copy
Binding Erase
mode selected
Original
Copy
Binding Erase
mode not selected
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-25
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals
1 Place your originals and press the [Special Original Frame

Features] key. Erase
2 Press the [Frame Erase] key.

3
3 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and

4 Select the size of the original, and press the

[Next] key.
NOTE
• You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only
on original sizes shown in the touch panel display.
size] key.
5 Set the desired original frame erase width

using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
The value set here is specified uniformly around
the original.
To set frame erase width values for the top,
bottom, left and right sides of the original
independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.

• Even when you enter the values with the Numeric
keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values with the
[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.
● When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key:
Select each side in turn and set the frame erase
3
width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK]
key.

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame
1 Place your originals and press the [Special

Features] key.
Book Frame
Erase
2
3
Press the [Frame Erase] key.
3 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press

the [Next] key.
4 Select the size of the book when opened, and

NOTE
size] key.
5 Press each key (“Top”, “Left”, “Center”,

“Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired

book frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key,
The values set here are specified independently
around the original. To set a value uniformly
around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once]
key.
NOTE
3
Clear
control panel.
keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values using the
[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.
• The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center”
and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top”, “Left”, “Right” and “Bot-
tom”.
● When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key:
Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the
desired frame erase width using the [–] or [+]
key, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE
Reset
3
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc.
1 Place your originals on the platen glass and Binding Erase


3
3 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the
[Next] key.
4 Specify the binding erase feature, and press

the [Next] key.
NOTE
• The position of the binding holes does not refer to
the position in which the original is placed on the
platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes
viewed when the surface of the original that you
want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the
top.
5 Set the desired binding erase width using the

[–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.

3
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a

Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing
pages of a book to fit on one side or both sides of a selected paper size.
IMPORTANT
• In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, Dif-
ferent Size Originals, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• Originals copied in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image
Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
• The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected paper size.

● 2 On 1
Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals Copy
Image Combi-
or nation
3
1
1 2
2 1
● 4 On 1
Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals Copy
or 1 2
2 1
3 4
3 3
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image 3-33
Combination)
● 8 On 1
Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.
Originals Copy
REPORT
REPORT
or
1 4
5 7 2 3
1 REPORT
6
2 8
3
5 6 7 8
3 7
5
8
4
7

NOTE
on p. 6-37.)
3
2 Press the [Image Combination] key.
3-34 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image
Combination)
3 Select the size of the originals, and press the

[Next] key.
NOTE
• When copying the two-sided original with the
Image Combination mode, press the [2-Sided
Original] key after selecting the original size.
size] key.

Select the type of original, and press the [OK]
key.

4
3
Select the desired Image Combination feature,
and press the [Next] key.
NOTE
• To make a two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided
Copy] key.
● When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:

Select the type of two-sided orientation, and
press the [OK] key.
Combination)

Select the image order, and press the [Done]
key.
2 On 1
4 On 1, 8 On 1
5
3

screen.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot set Automatic Paper Selection in the
Image Combination mode.
NOTE
• The machine automatically selects the copy ratio
depending on the selected paper size.

NOTE
• When you set the Image Combination mode, the
Shift mode is automatically set.
3-36 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image
Combination)
NOTE
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Reset

3
Combination)
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each

Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
This mode automatically divides an original into equal sections and copies each section in enlarged
form on a separate sheet.
IMPORTANT
• In the Image Separation mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,
Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image
Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
• Originals copied in the Image Separation mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Different
Size Originals mode in combination with the Image Separation mode.
• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Image
Separation mode.
The following Image Separation features are available: 1 to 2, 1 to 4, 2-Sided/ 1 to 2, and 2-Sided/ 1
to 4.
NOTE
• The enlargement ratio is automatically set to match the designated paper size.
● 1 to 2
Divides a one-sided original into two equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as
two 1-sided copies or one 2-sided copy.
3
Original Copy
Image Sepa-
ration
or
1 2
1
1
2
NOTE
• You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. When placed vertically,
each page is divided into upper and lower sections.
3-38 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a
Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
● 1 to 4
Divides a one-sided original into four equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as
four 1-sided copies or two 2-sided copies.
Original Copy
1 2
1 or
2 1
3 4
3 3

NOTE
• You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature.
1 Place your originals on the platen glass and

3
2 Press the [Image Separation] key.
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a 3-39
3 Select the desired Image Separation feature,

NOTE
• To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]
key.
● When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:

Select the appropriate orientation, and press
the [OK] key.
4
3
Select the layout for the last original, and

NOTE
• You can reduce the output of pages without images
(blank output) by setting the layout of the last origi-
nal.
1 To 2
1 To 4

Specify the image (print) order, and press the
[Done] key.
1 To 2

1 To 4
3
5 Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection in
the Image Separation mode.
NOTE
• The machine automatically selects the copy ratio
depending on the selected paper size.

Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a 3-41
NOTE
Start
• When there are multiple originals, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the
key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
3
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the

Feeder (Different Size Originals)
This function enables you to copy different-size originals with the same width or different-size origi-
nals with different widths, together in one group.
IMPORTANT
• In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Book 2-sided, Two-page Separation, Book-
let, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
• All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).
• Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals.
• Set the different-size originals with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the
originals.
- 11''x17'' and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR.
• When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass,

and as a result, the images may be scanned and copied slantwise.
• You cannot select the Shift mode when you set the Automatic Paper Selection in combination with the Dif-
ferent Size Originals mode.
• You cannot set the Staple mode when placing different-width originals.
• The Auto Orientation will not be performed when you set the Different Size Originals mode.
• When combined with 1to2-Sided originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized
originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes.
1 Place your original in the feeder and press the
3
[Special Features] key.
NOTE
• When Auto Collate is set to “On”, the Collate mode Image Separation
Different Size Originals
on p. 6-37.)
2 Press the [Different Size Originals] key.
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) 3-43
3 Select the type of the Different Size Originals,

screen.
NOTE
• When you set the same-width originals, press the
[Same Width] key.
• When you set the different-width originals, press
the [Different Width] key.


3
NOTE
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
Reset
3-44 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into mul-
tiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are cop-
ied as one document after all the batches have been scanned.
Originals Copies
Job Build

IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the copy settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the
3
necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original or the desired Finisher mode.
• If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when
• When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
• When you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the 1 2-Sided mode before-
hand if the first batch of originals is one-sided. If the first batch is two-sided, set the 2 2-Sided mode
beforehand. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of
original.
• It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot
prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See “Printing Multi-
ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)
1 Place your first original and press the [Special

Features] key.
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-45

2 Press the [Job Build] key.


3
Start
4 Press the key to start scanning the orig-
inals. 3 Stop
Start
NOTE
6
• You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual-
ity. (See “Adjusting Exposure and Image
Quality (Copy Exposure),” on p. 2-32.) 9
• You can change the setting of the original type Clear
(One-sided/ Two-sided). (See “Two-sided Copy- C

ing (Two-sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)
• You can change the number of copy sets. (See
“Entering the Copy Quantity,” on p. 2-36.)
• To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the
Stop
key.
● When scanning Two-sided originals:
Press the [2-Sided] key.
IMPORTANT
• Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi-
nal mode according to the type of originals.
3-46 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

Select the type of two-sided original, and press

the [OK] key.
5 When scanning is completed, set the next

original.

6
3
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the last original is
scanned, then press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features]
and [Job Build] keys in that order.
Reset
key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-47

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in

Memory (Mode Memory)
You can store any possible combination of the Copy functions, up to nine settings, in a memory key,
and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the Copy functions used frequently.
NOTE
• The copy jobs stored in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.
• You can store all functions (modes) except for the Interrupt mode.
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode
1
Program the copy job that you want to store in

the Basic Features or Special Features screen.
Mode Memory
NOTE
• In the display on the right, the Two-page Separation
and Margin modes are set.
3
2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
3 Press the [Store/Erase] key.
3-48 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)
4 Press the [Store] key.
5 Select the desired memory key from among

memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the

[Next] key.
NOTE
• The mode memory key where copy settings are
already stored shows a small, black square [ ■] in
the lower right corner of the key.
• If you selected a memory key to which a copy
mode has already been stored, its settings are dis-
played.
3
• If there are more stored copy modes than currently
displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ▼] or
[ ▲] keys.
● If you selected a memory key to which a copy
mode has not yet been stored:
The message to confirm whether or not you
want to store the new copy setting is displayed.
■ To store:
Select the [Yes] key. The new copy job is
stored to the memory key.
■ To cancel storing:
Select the [No] key, then select another key.
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-49
● If you selected a memory key to which a copy

mode has already been stored:
The message to confirm that you want to
replace the old copy mode with the new copy
mode is displayed.
■ To overwrite:
Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the
memory key are replaced with the new copy
setting.
■ To cancel storing:
Select the [No] key, then select another mem-
ory key.
When storing is completed, the message “Stored
in memory.” appears for about two seconds.
6 When the copy settings are stored, the mem-

ory key storing the copy mode is highlighted
and the stored settings are displayed.
3

screen.

Storing a Memory Key Name

1 Press the [Special Features] key.
3
4 Press the [Store Name] key.

3
5 Select the memory key ([M1] to [M9]) for which

you want to assign a name, and press the
[Next] key.
NOTE
played.
6 Enter the new name, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• For details on how to enter characters on the touch
panel display, see “Entering Characters on the
Touch Panel Display,” on p. 10-6.
• The maximum number of characters you can
assign for the name is 10.
• If you press the [OK] key without any characters
entered, the name of the memory key will revert
back to its default setting, e.g. [M1] or [M2].

screen.

3
Recalling a Copy Mode
3 Select the memory key where the copy setting

you want to recall is stored.
3
4 Check the copy settings stored to the memory

key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK]
key.
screen.
NOTE
• Recalling a copy job from memory cancels the cur-
rent copy mode.
• After recalling a copy job from memory, you can
change its settings and make copies.
• If you press another memory key, the copy mode
stored in that key is recalled.

Erasing a Copy Mode

3
4 Press the [Erase] key.
5 Select the memory key of the copy mode that

you want to erase, and press the [Next] key.
IMPORTANT
• Check the copy settings before you erase them.
NOTE
played.
• If there are more stored copy modes than currently
displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ▼] or
[ ▲] keys.
6 The message on the right appears to confirm

that you want to erase the copy mode.
Select the [Yes] key.
The stored copy mode is erased.
NOTE
3
• The name of the memory key is not erased. For

details on how to change the name, see “Storing a
Memory Key Name,” on p. 3-51.
• If you want to cancel erasing, select the [No] key.
The message “Erased.” is displayed for about two

seconds on the touch panel display.
7 Press the [Cancel] key.

screen.

Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)

You can recall up to three previously set copy modes and make copies using these settings.
IMPORTANT
Start
• One copy job is defined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom etc., and pressing the or
Reset
key when the Auto Clear function is on, or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. If one of these
keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy job by pressing the
[Recall] key is not possible.
• Once stored, the three copy jobs are held in memory even if the power is turned OFF.
• The Standard mode is not stored.
• Copy modes already stored is not stored.

Features] key.
Recall
3
2 Press the [Recall] key.
3-58 Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)

3 Select one of the [1 Before], [2 Before] or [3

Before] keys. Check that the copy settings are
correct, and press the [OK] key.
screen.
NOTE
• You can also check which copy modes are stored
to memory other than the currently displayed copy
mode by pressing the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key.

3
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) 3-59

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

This function enables you to make copies of the original inverting the black and the white areas.
Original Copy
SCENE SCENE
Nega/Posi

Features] key.
3
2 Press the [▼] key to display the Special Fea-

tures screen (2/2).
3-60 Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key.

3
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order.
Reset
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) 3-61

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated

(Image Repeat)
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the lengthwise or widthwise direction. The
following two setting methods are available for the Image Repeat mode.
● Automatic setting
The original image is copied so that the maximum possible of copies fit in the selected paper size.
Original Copy
CITY
CITY
Image Repeat
CITY
● Manual setting
The original image is copied for the specified number of times.
3
Original Copy
CITY
CITY CITY
CITY
Example : When “3 times” is specified.

*Images overlap when copied.
IMPORTANT
• In the Image Repeat (manual setting) mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-
page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase,
Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
• In the Image Repeat (auto setting) mode, combined use with the Automatic Paper Selection and Auto
modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.
3-62 Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)

Features] key.

tures screen (2/2).

3
3 Press the [Image Repeat] key.
4 Set the number of Image repeat times for each

of the lengthwise and widthwise directions.
● Automatic setting
Press the [Auto] key.
NOTE
• To make repeated copies with the number of
repeats automatically set, select the paper size.
The original image is then copied so that the maxi-
mum possible number of copies fit in the selected
paper size.
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) 3-63
● Manual setting
Press the [–] or [+] key to set the number of
images.
NOTE
• The number of times that the image can be set to
repeat is from 1 to 20.
• Sometimes the designated image will overlap
depending on how many times you have manually
set it to be repeated.

screen (2/2).
6
3

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], [Image Repeat], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
3-64 Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image)

This function copies images as if reflected in the mirror, reversing the right and left sides.
Original Copy
Mirror Image

IMPORTANT
• In the Mirror Image mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Margin, Frame
Erase, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
1 Place the original and press the [Special Fea-

tures] key.
3
tures screen (2/2).
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) 3-65

3 Press the [Mirror Image] key.


3
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], and [Mirror Image] keys in that order.
Reset
3-66 Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image)

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

This mode allows you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or
softer. To make copies with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To make copies with
photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key.
● Low
If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the
Photo mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften
this moiré effect so that the copy is easier on the eyes.
Original Copy
Low set Low not set

The world’s coral reefs, where The world’s coral reefs, where The world’s coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored fish and a brilliantly colored fish and a
myriad of other tropical creatures Sharpness myriad of other tropical creatures myriad of other tropical creatures
come together. come together. come together.
3
● High
This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more
sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.
Original Copy
High set High not set
The world’s coral reefs, where The world’s coral reefs, where The world’s coral reefs, where
brilliantly colored fish and a myriad brilliantly colored fish and a myriad brilliantly colored fish and a myriad
of other tropical creatures come of other tropical creatures come of other tropical creatures come
together. Aptly nicknamed together. Aptly nicknamed together. Aptly nicknamed
“Tropical Forests under the sea”, “Tropical Forests under the sea”, “Tropical Forests under the sea”,
these spots of breathtaking beauty these spots of breathtaking beauty these spots of breathtaking beauty
serve as home to countless serve as home to countless serve as home to countless
varieties of life, and to us of the varieties of life, and to us of the varieties of life, and to us of the
land, this alluring, dream-like land, this alluring, dream-like land, this alluring, dream-like
world forms a tropical paradise world forms a tropical paradise world forms a tropical paradise
filled with romance. filled with romance. filled with romance.
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-67


Features] key.

tures screen (2/2).
3
3 Press the [Sharpness] key.
4 Use the [Low] or [High] key to adjust the

sharpness, and press the [OK] key.
screen (2/2).
NOTE
• To copy text and lines clearly, the setting should be
towards “High”. To copy photographs etc., the set-
ting should be towards “Low”.
3-68 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)



NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-69

3
3-70 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)


This chapter describes the Mail Box functions with which you can temporarily store data for later
printing.
4
CH APTER
Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Printing Documents Stored in the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals

(Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step
(Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and
Storing it (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
(Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4
Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Collating Prints (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets
(Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4-1
4. Using the Mail Box Functions
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print) . . . . . .4-88
Checking the Document’s Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Moving a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
4
4-2
Flow of Mail Box Operations

This section describes the flow of basic Mail Box operations dividing it in two parts; Scanning origi-
nals and Printing.
NOTE
• For details on the following items, see the indicated pages.
- Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.)
- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.)
- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
Storing Originals in the Box

The operation is the same as when making copies. First, place the originals you want to store in the
feeder or on the platen glass, then set the desired modes. When the machine is used as a network
printer, you can store data into the box from a computer.

1 Press the MAIL BOX key.
COPY MAIL BOX SCAN
4
2 Select the desired box number.
NOTE
• When the desired box is not displayed, press the
[ ▼] or [ ▲] key.
• When you enter the box number using the Numeric
keys ( 0 - 9 ), press the [OK] key after entering the
box number.
• If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is
displayed next to that box icon.
• If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-
played with the [ ] icon.
Flow of Mail Box Operations 4-3

3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Enter the password used when the box was stored.
(See “Setting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.) If a
password has not been stored, this operation is not
necessary.
4 Press the [Scan] key.

5 Place your originals.

(See “Placing Originals,” on p. 1-11.)
4
6 Specify the scanning mode.
NOTE
• You can set various modes when scanning the
original as when making copies.
• When storing by designating the document name
when scanning, press the [Document Name] key.
(See “Giving a Name to the Document to be
Scanned (Document Name),” on p. 4-9.)
4-4 Flow of Mail Box Operations

Start
7 Press the key.
When scanning is completed, the display returns 3 Stop
to the screen in step 4. Start
6
IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the settings such as the scan- 9
ning quantity and scanning paper size during scan- Clear
ning. C
NOTE
• When you want to stop scanning, press the
Stop
[Cancel] key or the key.

● When the screen on the right appears:
Start
Press the key once for each original. When
NOTE
• You can change the setting of the Two-sided/
One-sided modes, Image Quality and Scanning
4
Exposure.
8 When scanning is completed, the scanned

data is stored in the selected box.
NOTE
• The stored document without designating the
name of document is automatically stored with the
name of “year, month, date and time". For example,
when the data was scanned at 1:35 (PM), 41 sec-
onds, on August 12, 2000, its name is
“20000812133541”.
• You can also change the name of the stored
data. (See “Changing the Name of a Document,”
on p. 4-91.)
• The stored data is deleted after 3 days. This can be
changed between “no limit” and 30 days. (See “Set-
ting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.)

Printing Documents Stored in the Box

You can print documents stored in a box from this machine. When the machine is used as a network
printer, you can also specify printing from the computer. For details on how to operate the machine
from personal computers, see the Remote UI Guide.
NOTE
• You can select and print up to 32 documents in one box at a time. When you merge documents, you can
select and print up to 100 documents. However, when there are reserved jobs in the box, the number you
can select and print varies depending on the number of documents in the reserved jobs.
• You can only select multiple documents when those documents are stored in the same box. To
print multiple documents stored in different boxes, you need to move the documents to one of the
boxes beforehand. (See “Moving a Document,” on p. 4-93.)
• When documents are printed without changing the settings, the documents sent from computers
are printed with the settings set from the computers, and the documents scanned into memory are
printed with the standard Local Print settings. (See “Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing,” on
p. 6-21.)
1 Press the key.

MAIL BOX
COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

4
2 Press the desired box number.
NOTE
• When the desired box is not displayed, press the
[ ▼] or [ ▲] key.
• When entering the box number using the Numeric
box number.
• If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is
displayed next to that box icon.
• If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-
played with the [ ] icon.

3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
password has not been stored, this operation is not
necessary.
4 Select the document you want to print.
NOTE
• When there are more than 4 stored documents,
press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key to display the other docu-

ments.
• You can select multiple documents stored in the
box.
• The selected documents are numbered in the order
specified, and are printed in the order numbered.
• When you press the [Select All] key, you can select
all documents in the box (The key changes to the
[Clear Selection] key).
• You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-
ment again.
• When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can
cancel all selection of the documents (The key
changes to the [Select All] key).
4
5 Press the [Print] key.

6 Press the [Start Print] key.

If there is a current job or a previously reserved
job, the machine will start printing after that job is
completed.
NOTE
• You can enter the printing quantity using the
Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ).
• If you make a mistake entering the quantity, press
Clear
the C key and enter the correct quantity.
• When you press the [Sample Print] key, one print is When you select one document.
made for you to confirm the printing output or the
settings and the image data of the stored docu-
ment. (See “Checking the Print Result or the Image
of the Stored Document (Sample Print),” on p.
4-88.)
• When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you
can change each print setting. (See “Printing a
Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Set-

tings,” on p. 4-61.)
• When you press the [Print & Erase] key, you can
delete the printed data.
• When you select multiple documents and press the
[Change The Copies] key, you can change the
number of prints. When you select multiple documents.
• You can change the exposure or cancel the printing
during printing.(See Chapter 5 “Printing Effi-
ciently”.)
When printing starts, the screen on the right

4
appears.
NOTE
• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. (You
Stop
cannot cancel printing by pressing the key.)
• To reserve the next print, press the [Done] key and
begin by selecting the box in which the desired
document is stored. (See “Reserving a Box Print
while Printing (Reserve Print),” on p. 5-9.)
When printing is completed, the display returns to

the Box selection screen.

Scanning Originals into a Box

Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document
Name)
You can give a name to the document before scanning.
1 Prepare to scan the original into the box following the procedure below.
MAIL BOX Select the desired box number Place the original
NOTE
• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.
2 Press the [Document Name] key.

Document
Size Select
3 Enter the name, and press the [OK] key.
4
NOTE
• For details on how to enter the characters, see
“Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,”
on p. 10-6.
assign for a name is 24.
Scanning Originals into a Box 4-9

4 Start scanning the original.

(See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)
NOTE
• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning
mode.)
Reset
• When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select)

You can select the document size when scanning transparencies, or when specifying the document
size before scanning.
NOTE
• The default setting is “Auto”.
NOTE
2 Press the [Doc. Size Select] key.
Document
Size Select
4
4-10 Scanning Originals into a Box

3 Select the document size, and press the

[Done] key.
IMPORTANT
• In the Automatic Document Size Selection mode,
combined use with the Booklet Scanning, Original
Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Com-
bination modes cannot be set.
• You cannot select the [Auto] key when scanning the
following type of originals. Specify the size of the
document manually.
- Non-standard size originals
- Highly transparent originals such as transparen-
cies
- Originals smaller than STMT in size
NOTE
• To select A or B series paper size, press the

[A/B-size] key.

NOTE
mode.)
Reset
• When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.
4
Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning
the Originals (Scanning Exposure)
Manual Adjustment of the Scanning Exposure
You can manually adjust the scanning exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
NOTE

2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key.
NOTE
keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to Light
Dark

NOTE
mode.)
Reset
• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Selecting Image Quality

You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The
following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.
● Text mode
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be
scanned clearly.
● Text/Photo mode
4
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos.
● Photo mode
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals
containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).
IMPORTANT
• If you scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moiré
may occur. If this happens, you can soften this morié effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See “Scan-
ning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness),” on p. 4-49.)
mode is canceled.
NOTE
• When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the scanning exposure can be adjusted only
by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be set.
• When the “Photo Mode” of Mail Box Settings is set to “On”, you can select printed image or photo after
pressing the [ ] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function,” on p. 6-51.)
• If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the
most appropriate level.

NOTE
2 Press the [ ] key.
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Printed Img.

3 Select the type of your original (Text,
Text/Photo, Photo).
4
When the “Photo Mode” of Mail Box Settings is set
to “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] or
[Photo] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the
Mail Box Function,” on p. 6-51.)

4 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the

scanning exposure.
NOTE

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.
mode.)
Reset
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality
NOTE
4
2 Press the [A] key.

The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted
to the level best suited to the quality of the
original. A
NOTE
• If the original is a transparency, you may not be
able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so,
adjust the scanning exposure using Manual Expo-
sure Control.


NOTE
mode.)
Reset
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio)

Scanning Originals after Enlarging/ Reducing them to a Standard Record
Size (Preset Zoom)
You can scan the originals after enlarging/reducing them to a standard record size.

Prepare to scan the original into the box following the procedure below.
Preset
MAIL BOX Select the desired box number Zoom Place the original
NOTE
Auto
Copy Ratio
4
3 To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge,
select an enlargement ratio.


NOTE
• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.
mode.)
Reset
Specifying the Scanning Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)

You can reduce or enlarge images by any scanning ratio, in 1% increments.
The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass,
and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.
1
4
Prepare to scan the original into the box following the procedure below.
NOTE
Zoom Designa-
tion

3 Enter the ratio using the Numeric keys

( 0 - 9 ) or the [–] and [+] keys.
NOTE
Clear
the C key, and enter the correct value.
NOTE

NOTE
4
mode.)
Reset

Automatically Setting the Ratio Based on the Selected Record Size (Auto)
In this mode, the machine automatically selects the appropriate scanning ratio based on the
selected record size.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset
Zoom or Zoom Designation mode.
• To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.
NOTE
• If an error occurs between the Auto scanning ratio and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with
• The record sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However,
when scanning STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the ”LTRR/STMT Original
Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on
p. 6-16.)
NOTE

4
3 Press the [Auto] key.

4 Select the record size, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
[A/B-size] key.

NOTE
• To return the ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.

• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Auto], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset
• When you press the key, the display returns the to the Box selection screen.
• If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro-
vided that the original size can be detected.
Start
• If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed.
• The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.
Calculating the Scanning Ratio Based on the Original and Record Size
(Zoom Program)
4
If you enter measurements for the original and desired scan images (or sheets), the machine will
automatically calculate and set the appropriate scanning ratio. The following two Zoom Program
modes are available.
• Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom)
Designate the same scanning ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions.
• Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom)
Designate different scanning ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions.
NOTE
• The designated sizes are converted to the scanning ratio (%) as follows:
- scanning ratio (%) = (scanning size ÷ original size) × 100

■ Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom)
NOTE
Zoom Program
Zoom

4

5 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the

original size, then press the [Record Size] key
and enter the size to be recorded. Then press
the [OK] key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the values
again.
[mm] key.
• For details on how to enter values in inches, see
“Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.
• To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction
(X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently,

press the [XY Zoom] key.
appear.
XY Zoom

NOTE
4
• To cancel the setting, press the [Zoom], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset
■ Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom)
NOTE



4

6 Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and [Y]

(vertical direction) keys for both the original
size and record size, and enter the values for X
and Y with the Numeric keys.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct
values.
[mm] key.
• For details on how to enter values in inches, see
“Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.
• To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press
the [Zoom] key.

appear.
7 Enter all values, and press the [OK] key.
Two-sided Origi-
nals
4
8 Start scanning the original
NOTE
order.
mode.)
Reset

Enlarging/Reducing Originals at Scanning Ratios Set Independently for X

and Y Axes (XY Zoom)
If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can scan an original enlarging or reducing it to different XY
scanning ratios.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the XY Zoom mode. Specify the
scanning ratio.
NOTE
• If an error occurs between the XY Zoom scanning and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with
Select the desired box number Place the original
MAIL BOX
NOTE

4

5 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each val-
ues for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• You can enter the numbers using the Numeric keys

( 0 - 9 ) on the control panel.
the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct
values.
4
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original)

This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to scan each side
separately.
IMPORTANT
• In the Two-sided Original mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, and
Image Combination modes cannot be set.
• Place the original horizontally when scanning originals such as LTRR/ STMTR size. If these originals are
placed vertically, the back side of the print will be printed upside down.

NOTE
2 Press the [2-sided Original] key.

3 Select the type of original, and press the [OK]

key.
4

NOTE
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [2-sided Original] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset

Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets

in One Step (Two-page Separation)
This feature enables you to scan facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper.
IMPORTANT
• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided Original, Booklet Scanning, Different
Size Originals, Binding Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
• Place your originals on the platen glass. You cannot scan originals placed in the feeder using the
Two-page Separation mode.
NOTE
• If you want to record in page order, begin scanning from the first page and work your way forward.

• Place the original face down so that the original’s top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.
Two-page Sep-
aration
4


Start
For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again. When scanning is
completed, press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Two-page Separation] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning)

You can scan originals in such a way that, when printing the scanned data, the output papers can be
easily made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet mode when printing the scanned data. (See “Making
4
Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 4-72.)
IMPORTANT
• In the Booklet Scanning mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Different Size Originals,
Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
• When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the
even number pages will be printed upside down. Place these originals vertically.
NOTE

Booklet Scan-
ning
Frame Erase
3 Press the [Booklet Scanning] key.

4 Select the original size, and press the [Next]
key.
NOTE
• To scan two-sided originals, also press the
4
[2-Sided Original] key.
[A/B-size] key.

Select the type of the original, and press the
[OK] key.

Original Frame
Erase
5 Select the booklet layout size, and press the

[OK] key.
NOTE
• The originals are recorded to match half the size of
selected paper size.
[A/B-size] key.


NOTE
4
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet Scanning], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)

This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals. The
following three Frame Erase features are available.
IMPORTANT
mode is canceled.
● Original Frame Erase

Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original
is smaller than the selected record paper size, then records it.
IMPORTANT
• In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet
Scanning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
● Book Frame Erase

Erases the dark borders as well as center and contour lines that appear when printing facing

pages in a bound original onto a single record paper, then records them.
IMPORTANT
• In the Book Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet Scan-
ning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
● Binding Erase
Erases the shadows that appear in prints from binding holes in originals, then records them.
IMPORTANT
• In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation and Booklet Scanning
4
modes cannot be set.
• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.

Erasing Frame Lines and Storing the Original (Original Frame Erase)
NOTE


4
4 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and


5 Select the size of the original, and press the

[Next] key.
NOTE
• You can only set the Original Frame Erase mode
for original sizes shown in the touch panel display.
[A/B-size] key.
6 Set the desired original frame erase width

using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
The value set here is specified uniformly around
the original.
To set frame erase width value for the top, bottom,

left and right sides of the original independently,
press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.
4
[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.
● When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key:
Select each side in turn and set the frame erase
width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK]
key.


NOTE
mode.)
Reset
Erasing the Book Frame and Storing the Original (Book Frame Erase)
NOTE
4
Book Frame
Erase

Binding
Erase
4 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press

the [Next] key.

5 Select the size of the book when opened, and
NOTE
4
[A/B-size] key.

6 Press each key (“Top”, “Left”, “Center”,

“Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired
book frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key,
The values set here are specified independently
around the original. To set a value uniformly
around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once]
key.
NOTE
Clear
control panel.

[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.
• The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center”
and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top”, “Left”, “Right” and “Bot-
tom”.
● When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key:
Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the
desired frame erase width using the [–] or [+]
key, and press the [OK] key.
4


NOTE
mode.)
Reset
Erasing the Shadows of Binding Holes and Storing the Original (Binding
Erase)
NOTE

• Place the original on the platen glass.

Image Combi-
nation
4

4 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the

[Next] key.
5 Specify the binding erase feature, and press

the [Next] key.
NOTE
• The position of the binding holes does not refer to
the position in which the original is placed on the

platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes
viewed when the surface of the original that you
want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the
top.
6 Set the desired binding erase width using the

[–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
4
Clear
control panel.
[–] or [+] key.
[mm] key.


NOTE

mode.)
Reset
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print

Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination)
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals and records them to fit on one side or
both sides of a selected record size.
4
IMPORTANT
• In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Two-page Sep-
aration, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Original Frame Erase, and Book Frame Erase modes
cannot be set.
• Originals printed in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image
Combination mode in combination with the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
• The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected record size.
● 2 On 1
Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet
and records them.
● 4 On 1
Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet
and records them.
● 8 On 1
Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet
and records them.

NOTE

3 Press the [Image Combination] key.

4
4 Select the size of the originals, and press the

[Next] key.
NOTE
• When reducing a two-sided original, press the
[2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original
size.
[A/B-size] key.


Select the type of original, and press the [OK]
key.
5 Select the desired Image Combination feature,


Select the image order, and press the [Done]
key.
4
2 On 1
4 On 1, 8 On 1

6 Select the record size, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• The document is scanned with the reduction ratio
automatically set depending on the selected record
size.
[A/B-size] key.


NOTE
4
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
mode.)
Reset


(Different Size Originals)
This function enables you to scan different-size originals with the same width, or different-size
originals with different widths, together in one group.
IMPORTANT
• In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Manual Document Size Select, Two-page
Separation, Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes
cannot be set.
• All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).
• Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals.
• Set the different-size originals with different width with the combinations as follows. Other combinations
may damage the originals.
- 11"x17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR.
• When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass,
and as a result, the images may be scanned slantwise.

NOTE
Different Size
Originals
3 Press the [Different Size Originals] key.

4 Select the type of the Different Size Originals,

NOTE
• When you set the same-width originals, press the
[Same Width] key.
• When you set the different-width originals, press
the [Different Width] key.
5 Press the [Done] key


NOTE
4
Start
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that
order.
mode.)
Reset

Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job

Build)
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into
multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are
stored as one document after all the batches have been scanned.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the scan settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the
necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original and desired Finisher mode.
• If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when
• When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different size Originals mode.
NOTE
• When you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the Two-sided Original mode
beforehand if the first batch of originals is two-sided. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided
Original mode according to the type of original.
• It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot

prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See “Printing Multi-
ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)
NOTE
4
Job build

3 Press the [Job Build] key.

Start
5 Press the key to start scanning the origi-
nals.
3 Stop
NOTE Start
• You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual-

6
4
ity. (See “Adjusting the Exposure and Image Qual-

ity before Scanning the Originals (Scanning 9
Clear
Exposure),” on p. 4-11.)
• You can change the setting of the original type C
(One-sided/Two-sided). (See “Scanning Two-sided
Originals (Two-sided Original),” on p. 4-25.)
• To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the
Stop
key.
● When scanning Two-sided originals:
Press the [2-sided Original] key.
IMPORTANT
• Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi-
nal mode according to the type of original.

Select the type of two-sided original, and press

the [OK] key.
6 When scanning is completed, set the next

original.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the last original is
scanned, then press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features]
and [Job Build] keys in that order.
4
• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]
key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scan-
ning mode.)
Reset
• When you press the key, the display returns to
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

This function enables you to record the original inverting the black and the white areas.
Nega/Posi
NOTE

3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key.


4

NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset

Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted

(Sharpness)
This mode allows you to scan original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To
scan originals with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To scan originals with
photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key.
● Low
If you want to scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo
mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this
moiré effect so that the print is easier on the eyes.
● High
This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more
sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.
Select the desired box number Place the original

MAIL BOX
NOTE
Sharpness
3 Press the [Sharpness] key. 4

4 Use the [High] or [Low] key to adjust the

sharpness, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• To scan text and lines clearly, the setting should be
towards “High”. To scan photographs etc., the set-
ting should be towards “Low”.


NOTE
4
• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order.
mode.)
Reset

Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory)

You can store any possible combination of the Scanning functions, up to nine settings, in a memory
key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently.
NOTE
• The scanning modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.
• The scanning modes you can store in memory key is Document Size Select, Scanning Exposure, Image
Quality, Copy Ratio, 2-sided Original, Document Name, Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, Differ-
ent Size Originals, Job Build, Nega/Posi, Sharpness, Frame Erase, and Image Combination.
■ Storing Scanning Modes
1 Call up the Scanning screen as follows:

Nega/Posi
MAIL BOX Select the desired box number
NOTE

2 Program the scan settings that you want to
store in the Scanning screen or Special Fea-
tures screen.
NOTE Mode Memory
• In the display on the right, the Nega/Posi and Job

Build modes are set.
4



[Next] key.
NOTE
4
• The mode memory key where scan settings are

already stored shows a small, black square [■] in
• If you selected a memory key to which a scanning
played.
• If there are more stored scanning modes than cur-
rently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼]
or [▲] keys.
● If you selected a memory key in which a scan-
ning mode has not yet been stored:
want to store the new scanning job is displayed.
To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new scanning
setting is stored into the memory key.
To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then
select another key.

● If you selected a memory key in which a scan-

ning mode has already been stored:
replace the old scanning setting with the new
scanning settings is displayed.
To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents
of the memory key are replaced with the new
scanning setting.
select another memory key.
7 When the scan settings are stored, the mem-

ory key storing the scanning mode is high-
lighted and the stored settings are displayed.

4
screen.

The display returns to the Scanning screen.

■ Storing a Memory Key Name

Nega/Posi
NOTE


4


[Next] key.
NOTE

played.
NOTE
4

screen.


■ Recalling a Scanning Mode

Nega/Posi
NOTE

4

4 Select the memory key where the scan setting

5 Check the scan settings stored to the memory

key.
screen.

NOTE
• "Recalling a scanning mode from memory cancels
the current scanning mode.
• After recalling a scanning mode from memory, you
can change its settings and scan.
• If you press another memory key, the scanning
mode stored in that key is recalled."

■ Erasing a Scanning Setting

Nega/Posi
NOTE



4

6 Select the memory key of the scanning mode

that you want to erase, and press the [Next]
key.
IMPORTANT
• Check the scan settings before you erase them.
NOTE
played.
• If there are more stored scanning modes than cur-
or [▲] keys.

The message on the right appears to confirm
that you want to erase the scanning mode.
The stored scanning mode is erased.
NOTE
4


screen.

4

Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after

Changing the Settings
You can select the modes when printing documents stored in a box.
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select)
1 Specify the desired document following procedure below.

MAIL BOX Select the desired box number, then the desired document
NOTE
2 Press the [Change P Settings] key.

3 Press the [Paper Select] key.
4
NOTE
• When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu-
ment recorded from a personal computer returns to
the former settings and the scanned document
returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.
Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-61

4 Select the print paper size, and press the

[Done] key.
● When you select the [StackBypass Setting] key:

Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.
NOTE
• If there is a current job or a previously reserved job
which uses the stack bypass, select the [StackBy-
pass Setting] key and set the desired paper.

[A/B-size] key.
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.

4

completed.
(See “Printing Documents Stored in the Box,” on
p. 4-6.)
NOTE
key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of
the Local Printing.)
Reset
4-62 Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings

Collating Prints (Finisher)

Merge Docu-
ments
The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the prints in various ways by pages or print sets.
(See “Collating Copies (Finisher),” on p. 2-48.)

NOTE
Finisher

3 Press the [Finisher] key.
NOTE
4

4 Select the desired collate feature, and press

the [OK] key.
NOTE
• When you selected the [Staple] key, press the
[Next] key.
• The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher
• The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher
(option) is not attached.
• The [Hole Punch] key only appears when the
Puncher Unit-B1 (option) unit is attached to the When the Finisher and the Punch-
Finisher. er Unit-B1 are attached.
• The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher
● When you select the [Staple] key:
Select the type of stapling( [Corner], [Double],
[Saddle Stitch] ), and press the [OK] key.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on
transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole
punch.
• The maximum number of papers which can be sta- When the Finisher is not attached.
pled at a time is as follows:
- 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR: 30 sheets
- LTR : 50 sheets
■ When you select the [Corner] key:
4
key.
IMPORTANT
• STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.

■ When you select the [Double] key:

key.
IMPORTANT
• LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be dou-
ble-stapled.
■ When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

Press the [Next] key.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot select the [Saddle Stitch] key when the
Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
• LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be saddle
stitched.

NOTE
• You can set the [Saddle Stitch] key when you select
the [Two-sided Printing] key. (See “Two-sided Print-
ing (Two-sided Printing),” on p. 4-67.)
• You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See
“Changing the Saddle Stitch Position,” on p. 6-33.)

● When you select the [Rotate] key:

When the Automatic Paper Selection is set,
press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or
LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key
in the following case:
- Available paper size is selected manually.
- Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal
and vertical direction.
- Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper
drawer loaded with available paper size is set to
“On”.
● When you select the [Hole Punch] key:
Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed
sheets.
IMPORTANT
• The machine automatically selects the type of hole

punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected
paper size.
- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR
• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, trac-
ing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.

4

completed.
p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and
[Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset

Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing)

IMPORTANT
• In the Two-sided Printing mode, combined use with the Booklet mode cannot be set.
• Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided prints.
NOTE
• Print paper used to make two-sided prints must conform to the following specifications.
- Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
- Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to print in
the Two-sided Printing mode.
• When printing an odd numbered document, the back of the last page is left blank. (The machine’s counter
does not count the blank page as a print.)
• Two-sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) when there are different-sized originals for the front
and back sides, will result in each original being printed on one side of paper that matches its size. When
you want to make prints on both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the
paper size you want to print on, before printing.

NOTE
4
Two-sided Printing
3 Press the [Two-sided Printing] key.
NOTE

4 Select the appropriate orientation, and press

the [OK] key.
NOTE
• If you want to print the first page of each document
on the front when documents are to be merged and
also the Finisher mode (except for the Group
mode) is selected, press the [Non Continuous] key.
If you want to print continuously without inserting
any blank pages between the documents, press
the [Continuous] key.

completed.
p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Print-
ing] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset
4

Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to

Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator)
When you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can program the
machine to automatically add front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each
document, using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text.
IMPORTANT
• You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode.
(See “Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)
• In the Cover/Job Separator mode, combined use with the Non-collate, Group, Offset Group, Memory Col-
lating, Memory Grouping, and Booklet modes cannot be set.
• You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or job separator sheets.
• Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30
sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).
1 Specify the desired documents following procedure below.

MAIL BOX Select the desired box number, then the desired documents
NOTE
Cover/Job
Separator
4
3 Press the [Merge Documents] key.
NOTE
• The [Merge Documents] key only appears when
you select multiple documents.

5 Press the [Cover/Job Separator] key.

6 Select the desired Cover/Job Separator fea-

ture, and press the [Next] key.
NOTE
• You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or
4
job separator sheets.

• You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key
again.
7 Select the paper source for each insertion

sheet, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Select the same paper size for the front and back
covers and the job separator sheets.
selected.


completed.

p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Cover/Job Separa-
tor] and [Cancel] keys in that order.
Reset

Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

You can make prints which can easily be made into a booklet.
IMPORTANT
• In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Collate, Two-sided Printing, and Cover/Job Separator modes
cannot be set.
• You cannot set the Booklet mode for a record size other than LTR/ STMT.
• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
NOTE
• When you want to print document for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the original with the
Booklet Scanning mode beforehand. (See “Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning),”
on p. 4-28.)

NOTE
Booklet
4
NOTE

4 Press the [Booklet] key.

Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when
IMPORTANT

• The paper used for the cover page must be the
same size as the other pages.
• The paper used for the main text must be from
17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).
• The paper used for the cover page must not be
heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2).
• You cannot print on the cover pages.
• When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot
set the paper used for the main text in the stack
bypass.
NOTE
4
• To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key.
• Place the paper face down for the cover page in the
stack bypass.
• 11''x17''/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
● When you select the [Add Cover] key:
Select the type of paper, and press the [Next]
key.
Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when

6 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the

booklet, and press the [OK] key.
IMPORTANT
• The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-
dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
• When the number of sheets exceeds 15, the sta-
pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be
output to the output tray.
NOTE
• The available number of output load on the booklet
tray in the saddle stitching is as follows:
- Number of sheets Number of load
1- 5 25 sets
6-10 15 sets
11-15 10 sets
• Saddle Stitching will not be performed when there
is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.

4

completed.
p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• To cancel the setting, press the [Booklet] and [Can-
cel] keys in that order.
Reset
the Box selection screen

Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge

Documents)
You can print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a
computer etc. as one document. This mode enables you to combine documents with different
settings as one document, so it is useful when you want to print documents as the following:
- When printing and stapling data created with different softwares, or data made by multiple people
as one document.
- When printing paste-up or transparency originals and data sent from a computer as one document
with the Booklet mode set.
IMPORTANT
• You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents.
• When you use this function to combine the documents, the settings for each document are cleared, and
prints are made with the Standard mode settings. When printing is completed, the settings of each docu-
ment return to the settings set when stored.
• You can change the settings of the Standard mode. (See “Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing,” on
p. 6-21.)

1 Specify the desired box following procedure below.
NOTE
2 Specify the documents in the order to be

merged, and press the [Print] key.
4
NOTE
• The selected documents are numbered in the order
specified.
• When you press the [Select All] key, you can select
all documents in the box (The key changes to the
[Clear Selection] key).
• You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-
ment again.
• When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can
cancel all selection of the documents (The key
changes to the [Select All] key).

4 Press the [Merge Documents] key.


completed.
4

p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• When printing multiple documents as one docu-
ment, “name of document” displayed during print
will only display the first specified document name.
Reset

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory

(Mode Memory)
You can store any possible combination of the Print settings, up to nine settings, in a memory key,
and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently.
NOTE
• The printing modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.
• The printing modes you can store in memory key is The number of printouts, Two-sided Print, Finisher,
Booklet, Cover/Job Separator, Sample Print, Merge Documents, and Delete After Printing.
■ Storing Print Settings

NOTE

Mode Memory
4
3 Program the print settings that you want to
store in the Change Print Setting screen or
Special Features screen.
NOTE
• In the display on the right, the Finisher and
Two-sided Printing modes are set.



4


[Next] key.
NOTE
• The mode memory key where print settings are
• If you selected a memory key to which a print mode
has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored printing modes than cur-
or [▲] keys.
● If you selected a memory key in which a print
mode has not yet been stored:
want to store the new print setting is displayed.

To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new print set-
ting is stored into the memory key.
select another key.
● If you selected a memory key in which a print

mode has already been stored:
replace the old print setting with the new print
setting is displayed.
4
To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents
of the memory key are replaced with the new
print setting.
select another memory key.
9 When the print settings are stored, the mem-

ory key storing the print mode is highlighted
and the stored settings are displayed.


screen.

The display returns to the Print Settings screen.
■ Storing a Memory Key Name

4
NOTE




[Next] key.
NOTE
• If you selected a memory key to which a print mode
has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
NOTE


screen.
4


■ Recalling a Printing Mode

NOTE

4

5 Select the memory key where the print setting

6 Check the print settings stored to the memory

key.
screen.
NOTE
• Recalling a print mode from memory cancels the
current print mode.
• After recalling a print mode from memory, you can
change its settings and make print.
• If you press another memory key, the print mode
stored in that key is recalled.

4

■ Erasing a Printing Mode

NOTE

4


7 Select the memory key of the print mode that

you want to erase, and press the [Next] key.
IMPORTANT
4
• Check the print settings before you erase them.

NOTE
• If you selected a memory key to which a printing
job has already been stored, its settings are dis-
played.
• If there are more stored print modes than currently
displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼] or
[▲] keys.

8 The message on the right appears to confirm

that you want to erase the print mode.
The stored print mode is erased.
NOTE


screen.
4

Checking the Print Result or the Image of the

Stored Document (Sample Print)
You can print one set of print output when you want to check the image before printing, or when you
want to check the settings and the image data of the document stored in the box.
IMPORTANT
• The [Sample Print] key only appears when you set the Collate or Staple mode. This key does not appear
when the Group mode is set. In addition, when you select multiple documents, this key does not appear
unless you set the Merge Documents mode.
NOTE
• You can make a sample print even when the number of print sets is one.

NOTE
2 Press the [Sample Print] key, and press the

[Start Print] key.
Sample set printing starts and one print set is Sample Print
made.
NOTE
• The number of print is not changed even when the
sample set is made.
4
3 Check the printed paper, and press the [Start

Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key.
NOTE
• To output the prints, press the [Start Print] key.
• To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key.
• To change the settings, press the [Change Set-
tings] key.
4-88 Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)
● When you select the [Change Settings] key:

Change the desired settings, then press the
[Done] key.
NOTE
• When you made a sample print without changing
the settings, press the [Change P Settings] key,
then change the settings.
When selecting one document and

printing without changing the settings

When selecting one document and
printing after changing the settings
4
When selecting multiple documents
and printing after changing the settings

completed.
(See “Printing Documents Stored in the Box,” on p. 4-6.)
NOTE
• When you want to check the changed settings,
press the [Sample Print] key again.
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample 4-89
Print)
Checking the Document’s Detailed Information

You can check the detailed information of documents stored in the box.

MAIL BOX Select the desired box number Select the desired document
NOTE
• When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-
lighted) document are displayed.
2 Press the [Details] key.

3 Check the detailed information, and press the

[Done] key.
4
Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears

again.
4-90 Checking the Document’s Detailed Information

Changing the Name of a Document

You can change the name of a document stored in the box.

NOTE
• When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-
lighted) document are displayed.
2 Press the [Details] key.

3 Press the [Change document name] key.
4 Enter the document name that you want to

change, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
on p. 10-6.
• You cannot store a document without a name.
• If you want to cancel storing, press the [Cancel]
key.
Changing the Name of a Document 4-91


Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears
again.
4
4-92 Changing the Name of a Document

Moving a Document
You can move a desired document to a different box.

NOTE
• If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear
Selection] key).
2 Press the [Move Document] key.

3 Specify the box to which you want to move the
document.
4
NOTE
• You cannot move a document to multiple boxes.
Moving a Document 4-93

4 Press the [Start] key.

NOTE
• If a document cannot be moved to the desired box,
a message telling you that you cannot move the
document will be displayed.
• If a document cannot be moved, it will remain in the
original box.
• If an error occurs while moving multiple documents,
the number of documents which have been moved
is displayed.

The display returns to the Box selection screen.
4
4-94 Moving a Document

Erasing a Document from a Box

You can erase a document stored in a box.

NOTE
• If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear
Selection] key).

3 Check the document, and press the [Yes] key.
NOTE
4
• If you do not want to erase the document, press the
[No] key.

The display returns to the Box selection screen.
Erasing a Document from a Box 4-95

This chapter describes operations to make print jobs more efficient.
5
CH APTER
Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) . . . . . . . . 5-5
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is
Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking and Changing Printing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5
Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-1
Changing the Exposure During Printing

You can change the copy or print exposure during printing.
1 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key on the right

screen which appears during printing.
The printing exposure is changed.
NOTE
In the Copy function

5
In the Mail Box function
When printing is completed, the display returns to

the Basic Features screen if the last used function
was the Copy function, or to the Box selection
screen if it was the Mail Box function.
NOTE
• Adjusting the exposure after printing has started
will produce a different result from the result before
scanning the original.
5-2 Changing the Exposure During Printing

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority

Copies (Interrupt Mode)
The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt the reserved or current job long enough to make other
priority copies. This mode is useful when making a rush copy during a long copy job.
IMPORTANT
• When making interrupt copy while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, make copies
without exchanging the control cards.
NOTE
• You can make interrupt copies if the machine is ready to scan.
• You can set the modes for the Interrupt copy even while an original is being scanned into memory or into
a box.
1 Press the
Interrupt
key. 1 2 3
Interrupt
Guide
The key remains constantly lit.
? 4 5 6
NOTE
7 8 9
• When you want to copy after changing the Clea
Interrupt
Department ID while the Department ID Man- ID 0 C
agement is enabled, press the ID key and
enter the Department ID and Password. (See Interrupt Mode
“Entering the Department ID and Password,”
Processing
on p. 10-4.) /Data Error
Interrupt
• Even when you press the key, the job currently
being output will not be interrupted until the inter-
rupt copy starts.
5
2 Place your original, then set the necessary
copy mode.
NOTE
• You can cancel the Interrupt mode by pressing the
Interrupt
key.
• You can cancel only the copy mode by pressing the
Reset
key. (The Interrupt mode will not be can can-
celed.)
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) 5-3
Start
3 Press the key.
Interrupt
When the Interrupt copy job starts, the key 3 Stop

stops flashing. Start
6
9
Clear
C
4 Once the original is scanned, remove it from

the machine.
IMPORTANT
• When the interrupt copy job is completed, the inter-
rupted printing operation restarts.
• If you want to continue the interrupt copy, wait until
the current interrupt copy job is completed (end of
printing).
5
5-4 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up

Even while the machine is warming up, an original can be scanned, or you can make print settings.
IMPORTANT
• If you scan originals while the machine is warming up, the time for the machine to warm up will be longer.
NOTE
• Jobs can be reserved during the following status:
- While the machine is warming up.
- While the machine returns from each energy-saving status.
- While the machine is warming up after a maintenance, inspection, or troubleshooting job.
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming

Up (Auto Start)
1 Place your originals and select the desired

copy mode.
NOTE
Auto Start
• While the machine is warming up, you can reserve
up to five copy jobs including the currently scan-
ning original. However, an interrupt copy job is not
counted.
• You can set a different mode for each job.
5
Start
2 Press the key.
The message “Scanning...” appears on the display.
A display shown on the right appears on the touch
panel display, depending on the copy mode.
Start
To scan the next original, press the key again.
When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key on the
Stop
touch panel display or the key.
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up 5-5

3 After the machine has finished warming up, printing starts.
NOTE
• If warm up ends while scanning is still in progress, printing starts at that point.
• You can change the exposure during printing. (See “Changing the Exposure During Printing,” on p. 5-2.)
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while

the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print)
1 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.

NOTE
2 To print without changing the settings, press

the [Start Print] key. If you want to change set-
tings before making a print, press the [Change Auto Print
P Settings] key and set the desired mode, then

press the [Start Print] key.
NOTE
• To make a sample print, press the [Sample Print]
key. (See “Checking the Print Result or the Image
of the Stored Document (Sample Print),” on p. 4-
5
88.)
• To erase the data after printing, press the [Print and
Erase] key.
• To print after changing the settings, see “Printing
a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the
Settings,” on p. 4-61.
5-6 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up

Reserving the Next Job during Printing

While the machine is printing, you can scan other originals or make print settings. You can print the
reserved job as soon as the current job is completed, so that you can reduce the time and effort
needed to scan the originals.
NOTE
• You can reserve up to five copy jobs for the Copy function including the current job. For the Mail Box func-
tion, you can reserve up to 32 documents regardless of the number of reserved jobs. However, interrupt
copy jobs are not counted.
• You can set a different mode for each job.
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy)

IMPORTANT
• When reserving a copy job while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, do not remove
that control card after that job is completed. If you remove the control card during printing, the job reserva-
tion will be canceled.
1 Press the [Done] key on the right screen which
appears during printing.
NOTE Reserve
Copy
• If the job displayed in the touch panel is the job of
functions other than the Copy function, press the
COPY key to display the Basic Features screen.
5
2 Place your originals on the platen glass or in
the feeder and set the desired copy mode.
Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-7

Start
3 Press the key and start scanning origi-
nals.
3 Stop
Start
6
9
Clear
C
NOTE
• If the screen on the right appears, press the [OK]
key and repeat the operation after the current job is
completed.
5
5-8 Reserving the Next Job during Printing

Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print)
NOTE
Reserve
• If the job displayed in the job monitor is the job of Print
functions other than the Mail Box function, press
the key to display the Box selection screen.
MAIL BOX
2 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.

Select the desired box number, then the desired document
NOTE
• If the Box selection screen appears after step 1, specify the desired box number.
• To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change settings before
making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode.
Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-9

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

When paper is fed from the stack bypass for the current print job or for a reserved job, you can des-
ignate the paper to be placed in the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
1 Press the [StackBypass Setting] key on the

Paper Selection screen that appears when set-
ting reserved print settings.
StackBypass
When there is no reserved print job, you can Setting
designate the paper size by pulling it out and re-

inserting it.
NOTE
• When Standard Stack Bypass Settings is set to
"On", and the [Stack Bypass] key is selected, the
paper stored in the standard settings is displayed.
(See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack
bypass,” on p. 6-19.)
2
NOTE
size] key.
• When storing paper as the Standard Stack Bypass
Settings, the paper size/type will be displayed.
(See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack
5
bypass,” on p. 6-19.)
3 Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.
5-10 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

The paper sizes previously set and the last set are
Paper size loaded
displayed as shown in the screen on the right. presently
Paper size
selected

Finish the reserved print settings.
Start
5
5
Press the key.
NOTE 3 Stop
• When reserving jobs of the Mail Box function, press Start
the [Start Print] key. 6
9
Clear
C
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs 5-11

6 Set the specified paper when its turn comes to

print.
NOTE
• The specified paper size is displayed when its turn
comes to print.
NOTE
size] key.
8 Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.

The machine starts printing.
5
5-12 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

Checking and Changing Printing Status

You can check and change the printing status (Stand-by, Printing, etc.) using the System Monitor
screen.
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents
1 Press the [System Monitor] key.
System Monitor
2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.
NOTE
• When checking the print status for copy jobs, press
the [Copy] key.
• When checking the print status for all jobs, press
the [Print] key.
3 Select the [Status] key. 5
Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-13

4 Select the document you want to check the

detailed information for and press the [Details]
key.
NOTE
• The status of each icon displayed in the screen is
as follows:
: Operating
: Waiting
: Error
: Paused
: Canceling
: Secured job
: Copy job
: Mail Box job
: Printer job
: Report job

[Done] key.
Repeating this operation returns the display to the
Details of a Copy document

5
Details of a Box document
5-14 Checking and Changing Printing Status

Canceling Printing
2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.
NOTE
• When checking the print status for copy jobs, press
the [Copy] key.
• When checking the print status for all jobs, press
the [Print] key.
3 Select the [Status] key.
4 Select the document to be canceled, and press

the [Cancel] key.
NOTE
• You cannot select multiple documents and cancel
them all in one action.

5 Press the [Yes] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key.
• The canceled document is displayed as “NG” on
the Print Log screen.

Repeating this operation returns the display to the
Priority Printing
NOTE
5
• When you set the priority printing, the machine starts printing it after the currently printing document is
completed.
Priority Printing

4 Select the document for priority printing and
press the [Print Next] key.
5

Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer

You can temporarily stop the print job sent from a computer, or skip an error when a print error
occurs.

5

4 Select the desired document, and press the

[Details] key.
5 Press the [▼] key.

Perform operations of the print job.
When you finish operating the document, press
the [Done] key.
NOTE
• When you press the [Pause] key, printing stops
temporarily, and the key changes to the [Resume]
key. When you press the [Resume] key, printing
restarts.
• You can continue the print job even when a print
error occurred, by pressing the [Auto Continue] key,
5
depending on the type of error. However, the print
output may not be the same as expected.
• When printing is canceled from the computer or
when the data is less than the volume of one page,
that job may not be correctly performed. When you
press the [Form Feed] key, you can force the print
data remaining in memory to be output.


Printing Secured Documents

You can print documents with a password sent from a computer. Documents with a password are
called secured documents.
Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with a mark at the left of the job number.
To print these documents, you need to enter a password, which prevents other people who do not
know the password from observing the contents.
IMPORTANT
• If the main power is turned OFF, the secured documents are erased.
• The secured document will be erased after the printing is completed.
• You cannot change the settings of the secured document.
Job Monitor
Secured Documents

5

4 Select the desired secured document, and

press the [Secured Print] key.
5 Enter a password, and press the [OK] key.

completed.
IMPORTANT
• Enter the same password set in the operation from
the computer. The machine becomes ready to print
the document.
NOTE
• To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key.
Checking and Canceling Spool Status
5
When print data is sent to this machine from a computer, the machine will process the input/output
data after temporarily storing it.
NOTE
• “Spool Status” will be displayed only when the printer function is attached.

E82_Chap05.US Page 22 Tuesday, May 29, 2001 4:04 PM
3 Select the [Spool Status] key.

4 Press the [ ] key.

5
● When you cancel spool job:

Select the [Status] key.

Select the document to be canceled, and press

the [Cancel] key.
Press the [Yes] key.
NOTE
• To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key.
● When you check the detailed information:
Select the [Status] or [Log] key.
5
Select the document you want to check the
detailed information for and press the [Details]
key.

Details of a status
Details of a log

[Done] key.
The display return to the Basic Features screen.
5

Checking the Printing History
3 Press the [Log] key.
4 Press the [Job Type] key.

5 Select the type of job that you want to check

the log.
NOTE
• The [Printer] key is displayed only when the net-
work printer function is enabled.
6 After checking the printing job history, press

the [Done] key.
NOTE
• When the document has been printed correctly,
“OK” is shown. “NG” is shown for documents of
which printing has been canceled.
• In the Log, the printing job history of up to 40 docu-
ments can be displayed.
● When you select the [Details] key:

Check the detailed information, and press the
[Done] key.
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen
5
appears again.

Checking the Device Status

You can check the amount of paper remaining in each paper drawer, the remaining memory
available, the location of a paper jam, and so on.
Device Sta-
tus
2 Select the [Device] key.
5
3 After checking the device status, press the
[Done] key.
NOTE
• The [Paper Jams], [Staple Loading], [Staple Jams],
[Adding Toner] or [Punch Waste] key appears
below the “Recovery Steps”, depending on each
status. When you press each key, the display
shows how to remove the jammed paper, how to
add toner, etc.

5

Setting and Adjusting Common

Settings to Suit Your Needs
This chapter describes the initial settings and how to change them to suit your needs.
6
CH APTER
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . 6-10
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your

Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the
Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image
Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Needs
Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6
Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-1
6. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs
Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41

Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings). . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Setting the Auto Offline On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74
Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Needs
6
6-2
Additional Functions Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in the Additional Functions screen. (* indicates factory
default setting)
NOTE
• In addition to the modes listed below, the [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], and [Remote UI On/Off]
modes are displayed when the network printer function is enabled.
• For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.
- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)
- [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.)
- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)
Applicable
Additional Function Available settings page
Common Settings
Initial Function Copy*/ Mail Box p. 6-6
Set System Monitor Screen as initial function:
On/ Off*
Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor :
On*/ Off
Auto Clear Setting Initial Function*/ Selected Function p. 6-7
Audible Tones Entry Tone/ Error Tone/ Job Done Tone p. 6-8
(All On*/Off)
Inch Entry On*/ Off p. 6-9

Drawer Eligibility For Copy*/ Printer/ Mail Box/ Other p. 6-10
APS/ ADS (Stack bypass: On/ Off*, Drawers: On*/ Off)
Copy: Consider Paper Type: On/ Off*
Store Paper Type Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck: p. 6-12
Plain*/ Heavy/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/
Bond/ 3-Hole Punch
Paper drawer (3, 4):
Plain*/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/ Bond/
3-Hole Punch
Energy Saver Mode —10%*/ —25%/ —50%/ None p. 6-14
Function Key Wake Up On/ Off* p. 6-15
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode Low*/ High p. 6-15
LTRR/STMT Original Selection Distinguish Manually/ Use LTRR Format*/ p. 6-16
Use STMT Format
Tray Designation Tray A: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other* p. 6-17
Tray B: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other*
Needs
Printing Priority 1:Copy (Priority)/ 2:Printer/ 3:Other p. 6-18

Standard Stack Bypass Settings On/ Off* p. 6-19
6
Additional Functions Settings Table 6-3

Available settings Applicable

Additional Function page
Common Settings
Standard Local Print Settings Paper Select: Auto*/ Select paper supply p. 6-21
Copies: 1* to 2,000 sets
Finisher:
- With the Finisher
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/
Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))
- With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/
Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/
Hole Punch
- With the Copy Tray-C3
Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collating/
Group/ Rotate Grouping
Two-sided Print : On/ Off*
Erase Document After Printing : On/ Off*
Merge Documents: On/ Off*
Initialize Common Settings Initialize p. 6-23
Timer Settings
Date & Time Settings Default setting (12-digit number) p. 6-24
Time Zone Settings: GMT—12:00 to GMT+12:00,

(GMT—5:00*)
Summertime Settings: On/ Off*
Change Auto Sleep Time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., p. 6-26
1 hour*, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours
Change Auto Clear Time 0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 2 min.* p. 6-27
Time Until Unit Quiets Down 0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 1 min.* p. 6-28
Daily Timer Settings Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in p. 6-29
one-minute increments
Low Power ModeTime 10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., p. 6-30
1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours
Adjustment/Cleaning
Zoom Fine Adjustment X/ Y: 0*, —1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments p. 6-31
Saddle Stitcher Staple Press the [Start] key. p. 6-32
Repositioning
Needs
Saddle Stitch Position —2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm increments p. 6-33

Adjustment
Exposure Recalibration 9 Steps, 5* p. 6-34
Feeder Cleaning Press the [Start] key. p. 8-30
6
Wire Cleaning Press the [Start] key. p. 8-31
6-4 Additional Functions Settings Table

Available settings Applicable

Additional Function page
Copy Settings
Standard Key 1, 2 Settings All modes (No setting*) p. 6-35
Auto Collate On*/ Off p. 6-37
Image Orientation Priority On/ Off* p. 6-38
Job Duration Display On/ Off* p. 6-39
Auto Orientation On*/ Off p. 6-40
Photo Mode On/ Off* p. 6-41
Standard Settings Store, Initialize p. 6-42
Initialize Copy Settings Initialize p. 6-45
Mail Box Settings
Box Set/Store Number: 0 to 99 p. 6-46
Store Name: 24 characters max.
Password: 7 digit number max.
Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7,
30 days, 0 (no limit)
Initialize
Photo Mode On/ Off* p. 6-51
Standard Scan Settings Store, Initialize p. 6-52
System Settings
System Manager Settings System Manager: 32 characters max. p. 6-55
System Manager ID: 7 digit number max.
System Password: 7 digit number max.

E-mail Address: 64 characters max.
Contact Information: 32 characters max.
Comment: 32 characters max.
Department ID Management Department ID Management: On/ Off* p. 6-58
(Store Dept. ID/Password, Print Totals,
Accept Jobs with unknown ID: On*/ Off)
Device Info Settings Device Name: 32 characters p. 6-72
Location: 32 characters
Clear Message Board Erase p. 6-73
Auto Offline On/ Off* p. 6-74
Report Settings
User s Data List Print p. 6-75 Needs
6
Additional Functions Settings Table 6-5

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each

Function (Common Settings)
NOTE
• The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [ ▲] keys to scroll to the
desired screen and make the required settings.
• When the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON

You can specify which screen to display, when you turn ON the main power. The System Monitor
screen also can be specified.
NOTE
• The default settings as follows:
- Select Initial Function: Copy
- Set “System Monitor Screen” as initial function: Off
- Set [Device] as the default for “System Monitor”: On
1 Call up the desired screen as follows:
Additional Functions Initial Function

key Common Settings
2 Select the [Copy] or [Mail Box] key, and press

the [OK] key.
● When you select the [Copy] key:
The Copy Basic Features screen is displayed
when the main power is turned ON, or after
Auto Clear.
● When you select the [Mail Box] key:
The Mail Box selection screen is displayed
when the main power is turned ON, or after
Auto Clear.
● When using the System Monitor screen as initial
screen:
Select the [On] key, and press the [OK] key. The
System Monitor screen is displayd when the
main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear.
Needs
NOTE
• When you do not want to set the Device window as
6
a default window in the System Monitor screen,

press the [Off] key and press the [OK] key. When
you select the [Off] key, the Copy window is set as
the default window.
6-6 Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)

Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear

Gives you the choice of whether or not to display the screen set by this function after Auto Clear has
taken place.
NOTE
• The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See “Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic
Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-27.)
• The default setting is “Initial Function”.
key Auto Clear Setting
2 Select the [Initial Function] or [Selected Func-

tion] key, and press the [OK] key.
● When you select the [Initial Function] key:

The screen set under Initial Function is dis-
played after Auto Clear has taken place. For
example, if Copy is set under Initial Function
and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail
Box function, the display returns to the Copy
● When you select the [Selected Function] key:
The display returns to the screen that was dis-
played before Auto Clear takes place. For
example, even if Copy is set under Initial Func-
tion and Auto Clear takes place after setting the
Mail Box function, the display returns to the Mail
Box selection screen.

Needs

6
Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-7
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone

Gives you the choice of whether or not to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the
following times:
Entry Tone : When pressing keys on the control panel or keys in the touch panel display
Error Tone : When a malfunction occurs (e.g. paper jam or operational error)
Job Done Tone : After the last copy has been made (e.g. outputting or stapling is completed)
NOTE
• The default setting is “On” for all tones.
key Audible Tones
2 Select the [On] or [Off] keys for “Entry Tone”,

“Error Tone” and “Job Done Tone”, and press
the [OK] key.

Needs
6
Setting Inch Input

You can display the keys for entering values in inches in the numeric entry screen.
NOTE
• The default setting is “On”.
Additional Functions Inch Entry

key
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK]

key.

Needs
6
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto

Drawer Switching
The paper drawers to be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching can be set.
This setting can be made independently for Copy, Mail Box, and other functions. It is useful when
different paper drawers are to be used for different purposes.
NOTE
• Paper drawers set to On are used for the following functions:
- Auto Paper Selection (APS) : The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper
drawer) for the size of the original and the set ratio.
- Auto Drawer Switching (ADS) : If a paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous printing job, the
machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same
paper size and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
• The default settings are “Off” for the stack bypass and “On” for the paper drawers (1 to 4).
key Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS
2 Select the [Copy], [Mail Box], [Printer] or

[Other] key.
NOTE
• You can select the [Printer] and [Other] keys only
when the network printer function is enabled.
• The [Other] key is pressed when setting the paper
drawers to be reported with the report printing.
Needs
6
3 Select the [On] or [Off] key for the stack

bypass and each paper drawer, and press the
[OK] key.
● When you select the [On] key:
Makes the paper drawer eligible for APS/ ADS.
● When you select the [Off] key:
Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APS/
ADS.
NOTE
When you select the [Copy] key.
• When you select the [Copy] key, you can select
whether or not to set priority to paper type.
• If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to On,
paper will not be fed even when paper runs out
during printing, unless other loaded papers suit the
size and stored type. For details of stored paper
types, see “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper
Drawer,” on p. 6-12.
• If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to Off,
paper will be fed from another paper drawer when
paper runs out during printing, if the same paper
size is loaded in that paper drawer.
• When you select the [Printer] key, the Stack bypass
icon is not displayed.
• The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-

lowing places.
Stack bypass
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
Paper Deck (option)

Needs
6
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer

You can store the paper type loaded to each paper drawer.
key Store Paper Type
2 Select the paper drawer for which you want to

store the paper type.
3 Select the paper type loaded in the paper

drawer, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Load the same type of paper as set in each paper

drawer.
• For details of paper types, see “Available Paper
• The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-
lowing places.
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
Paper Drawer 3
Paper Drawer 4
Paper Deck (option)
Needs
6

NOTE
• The paper types stored here are displayed when
selecting paper in each mode, as shown on the
right.

Needs
6
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting

You can change the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power consumed by the machine.
NOTE
• The default setting is “–10%”.
key Energy Saver Mode
2 Select the [-10%], [-25%], [-50%] or [None] key,

NOTE
• The approximate energy savings figures for each
mode and the approximate delay times from power
ON to ready to print status are listed below.
- –10% mode : 10% less power (approx. 50 sec.)*
- None : 2% less power (approx. 0 sec.)*
* The figures in parenthesis ( ) show the approxi-
mate time it takes for the machine to return to the
ready to print status.

Needs
6
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the

Machine
You can set the COPY , MAIL BOX , and SCAN keys as the keys to reactivate the machine from the Energy
Saver mode.
NOTE
• The default setting is “Off”.
key Function Key Wake Up

key.

Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

You can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode.
NOTE
• In the following cases, the energy consumption when the machine enters the Sleep mode will be “High”
regardless of this setting. For details such as setting each function, see the Network Guide or the Printer
Guide.
- [Function Key Wake Up]:ON
- [TCP/IP Settings] → [IP Address] → [DHCP]:ON
Needs
- [NetWare Settings]:ON
- [AppleTalk Settings]:ON
• The default setting is “Low”.
6
key Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode
2 Select the [Low] or [High] key, and press the

[OK] key.

Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals

When scanning LTRR size or STMT size originals set on the platen glass, you can make a setting to
either distinguish the original sizes manually, or to scan originals of only one of these sizes.
NOTE
• The default setting is “Use LTRR Format”.
key LTRR/ STMT Original Selection
2 Select the [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR

Format] or [Use STMT Format] key, and press
the [OK] key.
● When you select the [Distinguish Manually] key:
If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the
platen glass, a display to select the original size
appears when scanning.
● When you select the [Use LTRR Format] key:
Needs
platen glass, the machine detects it as LTRR-

size original.
● When you select the [Use STMT Format] key:
6

platen glass, the machine detects it as STMT-
size original.

Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function

You can select the function for which each output tray of the Finisher-F1 (option) or the Saddle
Finisher-F2 (option) is to be used.
IMPORTANT
• This function cannot be set when the Finisher-F1 or the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
NOTE
• The default settings are as follows:
- Tray A: Copy, Printer, Other - Tray B: Copy, Printer, Other
• It is possible to assign a single tray to multiple functions.
• We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays for identifying their respective use.
Blank labels are also provided which you can fill out yourself.
Additional Functions Tray Designation

key

2 Select the functions of dedicated output trays
A and B, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-
• Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as
“Other”.
• When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the
tray while both trays are set as the designated tray
for a certain function, the machine automatically
changes the output tray to other available tray.
• When you want to set a tray as the designated tray
for only a certain function, select only that function.

Needs

6
Setting the Printing Priority

You can set the printing priority. A job that is set to a high priority is printed preferentially after the job
currently being performed.
NOTE
- Copy: 1 (Priority) • Printer: 2 • Other: 3 (1, 2 and 3 indicate priority sequence.)
• Priority printing will not take place even when you set the highest priority until the current job is completed.
However, if the current job is paused, printing of the job from a function with higher priority may be started
depending on the settings set.
key Printing Priority
2 Select the printing priority, and press the [OK]

key.
Setting [1] sets the highest printing priority.
NOTE
• You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-
• Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as
“Others”.
• When the same printing priority has been set for
multiple functions, printing starts from whichever of
the functions is set to print first.

Needs
6
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass

Stores the default settings for the StackBypass Setting. By pressing the [Stack Bypass] key when
making reserved prints, you can reserve by the mode that you stored here.
NOTE
• When using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy and Mail Box functions, you must select the
stack bypass as the Auto Paper Drawer Selection.
Additional Functions Standard Stack Bypass Settings

key
2 Select the [On] or [Off] key.
NOTE
• When you select the [On] key, the mode returns to
the stored standard paper mode when you press
Reset
the key or after Auto Clear has taken place.
Proceed to step 3.

Press the [Store] key.
NOTE
size] key.
Needs
6
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.


Needs
6
Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing

The machine prints documents with the standard Local Print settings set here when printing
documents in the Mail Box without changing the settings set when documents were scanned, or
when printing documents sent from a personal computer after pressing the [Change P Settings] key.
It also prints with the standard Local Print settings when you merge documents.
• Paper Select (Paper source)
• Copies
• Finisher
-With the Finisher
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))
-With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1
Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/
TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch
-With the Copy Tray-C3
Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collate/ Group/ Rotate Group
• Two-sided Print (On/ Off)
• Erase Document After Printing (On/ Off)
• Merge Documents (On/ Off)
NOTE
- Paper Select : Auto
- Copies :1
- Finisher : Offset Collate (With the Finisher)

- Two-sided Print : Off
- Erase Document After Printing : Off
- Merge Documents : Off
key Standard Local Print Settings
Needs
6
2 Set each mode.

● Paper Select
Select the paper source.
● Copies
Set the number of copies from 1 set to 2000
sets.
● Finisher
Set the type of collating.
● Two-sided Print
Set whether or not to perform two-sided print-
ing.
● Erase Document After Printing
Set whether or not to erase the document after
printing.
● Merge Documents
Set whether or not to merge documents when
you select multiple documents.
3
Once you have completed all settings, press

the [Done] key.

Needs
6
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

This function allows you to return the common settings to their defaults (initial settings).
Additional Functions Initialize Common Settings

key
2 Select the [Yes] key.
NOTE
• To cancel initialization, select the [No] key.
This screen is displayed for about two seconds.

Needs
6
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)

NOTE
• The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [ ▲] keys to scroll to the
Setting the Current Date and Time

Sets the current date and time. The date and time set here is also used as the time setting required
for functions for which the time can be set.
Additional Functions Date & Time Settings

key Timer Settings
2 Enter the current date (year, month, day) and

time with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and
press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Enter the date as four digits without a space.
- Example: March 25 → 0325
• Enter all the four digits for the year.
• Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits
without a space.
- Example: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318
Clear
the C key, and enter the values again starting with
the year.
● When setting the Time Zone Settings:
Press the [Time Zone Settings] key, then select
the time zone where the machine is located.
Then press the [OK] key.
NOTE
Needs
• Press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key to scroll the list.

•The default setting is “GMT–5:00”.
Central time (US Canada) :GMT–5:00
6
Eastern time (US Canada) :GMT–6:00

Mountain time (US Canada) :GMT–7:00
Pacific time (US Canada) :GMT–8:00
6-24 Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)

● When setting the Daylight Saving Time Settings:

Press the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] key,
then press the [ON] key.
Press both the [Start Date] and [End Date] keys

to set the time.
Set the month, week, day, time to start and end

the Daylight Saving Time settings, and press
the [OK] key.

NOTE
• You can set the time from 0-23, in 1 hour incre-
ments.
• When you set the Daylight Saving Time, the
machine automatically sets the standard time of
the machine one-hour forward.
Needs

6
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) 6-25

Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Opera-

tions
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the control panel
power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine then enters the Sleep mode.
NOTE
• The default setting is “1 hour”.
key Change Auto Sleep Time
2 Enter the desired Auto Sleep Time with the [▼]

or [▲] key, and press the [OK] key.
The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30,
40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4
hours (in one-hour increments).

Needs
6

Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen

after Finishing Operations
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the display returns
to the Basic screen (Standard setting) of the selected function.
This time is called “Auto Clear Time”. Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute
increments. Auto Clear Time can also be set to “Off”.
NOTE
• The default setting is “2 minutes”.
• When “0” is set, Auto Clear function is not set.
key Change Auto Clear Time
2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric

keys ( 0 - 9 ) or [–] and [+] keys, and press
the [OK] key.
The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9
minutes (in one-minute increments).

Needs
6

Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task
This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed following a print
job or after a key has been pressed. On this screen you can specify the amount of time that must
elapse prior to entering the Quiet mode.
NOTE
• The default setting is “1 minute”.
• When “0” is set, the Quiet mode is not set.
key Time Until Unit Quiets Down
2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric

keys ( 0 - 9 ) or [–] and [+] keys, and press
the [OK] key.
The Quiet mode settings are from 0 to 9 minutes
(in one-minute increments).

Needs
6

Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Differ-
ent Days of the Week
You can set the time that the machine is automatically turned OFF for each day of the week.
• Setting range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute increments
NOTE
• The default setting is “no setting”.
• When Auto Clear Time and Daily Timer are both set, Auto Clear Time has priority.
key Daily Timer Settings
2 Select the day of the week, enter the time with

the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the
[OK] key.
NOTE
• Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits
without a space.
- Example: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

• If you make a mistake when entering the time,
choose the day of the week again, then enter a
four-digit number.
• If you do not want to specify the time, press
Clear
the C key.

Needs
6

Setting the Low-Power Mode Time

If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have
been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.
You can easily change the time for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode.
NOTE
• The default setting is “15 minutes”.
Additional Functions Low-Power Mode Time

key
2 Select the Low-Power Mode Time by pressing

the [▼] or [▲] key, and press the [OK] key.
The Low-Power Mode Time settings are 10, 15,
20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2
to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).

Needs
6

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)

NOTE
• The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [ ▲] keys to scroll to the
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image

and Print Image Occur
When you print a copy or a document in a box, if a slight difference occurs between the size of the
original image and the size of the print image, you can perform fine adjustment so as to reduce this
error.
Additional Functions Adjustment/

key Cleaning
Zoom Fine Adjustment
2 Press the [–] or [+] key to adjust the percent-

age (%), and press the [OK] key.

The adjustment range for both the X (left-right
direction) and the Y (up-down direction) is from
–1.0 % to +1.0 % in 0.1 % increments.

Needs
6
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) 6-31

Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher

After a staple jam in the Saddle Finisher Unit has been cleared or staples are loaded in the Saddle
Finisher, this function feeds paper to the unit and staples a few times, so that staples will be
immediately available for the next job.
IMPORTANT
• This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
NOTE
• The required paper is fed automatically.
• The following paper sizes can be used for this function: 11"x17"/ LTRR.
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
key
NOTE
• To cancel the staple repositioning, press the [Can-
cel] key.

Needs
6
6-32 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)

Changing the Saddle Stitch Position

When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, slight position differences in the saddle stitch position
may occur. You can compensate for such differences.
IMPORTANT
• This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
key Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment
2 Select the paper size for which you want to

change the saddle stitch position.
NOTE
• Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be
available in certain countries.

3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to adjust the saddle
stitch position, and press the [OK] key.
The setting range is from –2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in
0.25 mm increments.
The example shows adjustment for

11"x17"-size paper.

Needs

6
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) 6-33

Adjusting the Standard Exposure

Adjusts the exposure adjustment scale to calibrate differences in exposure. Perform this adjustment
if differences between the image in the original and the print occur when printing an original free
from smudges or dirty marks with the exposure scale set in the middle.
NOTE
• The default setting is “5”.
key
2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] keys to adjust the

exposure, and press the [OK] key.

Needs
6
6-34 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function

(Copy Settings)
NOTE
• The Copy Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [ ▲] keys to scroll to the
Setting Standard Keys

You can store up to two Standard keys from the Copy Ratio, Finisher and Two-sided Mode keys on
the Basic Features screen, the keys in the Special Features screen, or the memory keys containing
copy jobs stored in the Mode Memory.
key Standard Key Settings
2 Press the [▼] or [▲] key and press the group

of the function that you want to store as your
favorite key.

3 Select the desired mode to be stored as a
Standard key, and press the [OK] key.
Needs
6
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) 6-35

4 Press the [Done] key. Selected mode

Repeat this until the Basic Features screen
appears again.
Example: Standard keys 1 and 2 are displayed in

the touch panel display as shown on the
right.
Standard key 2
Standard key 1
Needs
6
6-36 Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)

Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off

This function allows automatic selection of the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when the original is
placed in the feeder. This is helpful when making multiple copies, because the user does not need
to remember to select the Finisher mode.
NOTE
• When Auto Collate is set to “On” with the Finisher (option) attached, the Offset Collate mode will be set.
Without any output option attached, the Collate mode will be set.
key Copy Settings Auto Collate

key.

Needs
6

Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off

The orientation of the image may be printed conversely depending on the copy mode set. You can
set whether or not to copy the image in the same direction as the original.
NOTE
• When the Image Orientation Priority is “On”, the first copy time will take longer.
key Image Orientation Priority

key.

Needs
6

Setting the Job Duration Display

When the Job Duration Display is set to “On”, the time remaining until completion of the copy job
(Job Duration Time) is indicated in minutes in the touch panel display. (The job duration time is not
displayed for some copy modes.)
NOTE
• The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different
Size Originals, Rotate Collating, and Rotate Grouping modes or when the copy waiting time is less than
one minute.
key Job Duration Display

key.

Needs
6

Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off

Using parameters such as original size and zoom ratio, this function automatically rotates the image
to the most suitable position for the set paper size.
NOTE
Additional Functions Auto Orientation

key

key.
NOTE
• Only standard size originals up to LTR (for direct
zoom ratio) can be rotated.
• The Auto Orientation will not be performed when
you set Enlarging.
• When Automatic Paper Selection is selected, the
paper matching the width will be displayed as the
optimum size if there is no paper with the optimum
length.

Needs
6

Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function

You can set whether or not to use the Photo mode in the Copy function. When the Photo Mode is
“On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when making copies with the image quality
setting.
NOTE
Additional Functions Photo Mode

key

key.

Needs
6

Changing the Current Standard Settings

Standard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine is set to after the power
is turned ON or when the key is pressed.
Reset
This section describes how to store the currently set copy settings as the Standard Settings.
Standard Settings can also be returned to their default settings.
NOTE
- Copy quantity: 1
- Paper selection: Automatic Paper Selection
- Exposure/ Image quality: A
- Copy Ratio: Direct (100%)
- Copy function: 1→1-sided copy
■ Storing the Standard Settings for Copying

NOTE
• To change the Standard Settings, Copy settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings
beforehand. (See “Flow of Copy Operations,” on p. 2-3.)
key Standard Settings

Needs
6


The settings currently displayed are stored as the
Standard Settings.
NOTE
• The settings displayed here are the currently set
copy settings. Press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key to display
copy modes that do not fit in the display area.
• To cancel storing the currently displayed settings
as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The
display returns to the screen in step 2.

■ Initializing the Standard Settings
key
2 Press the [Initialize] key. Needs

6

3 Check the setting, and press the [Yes] key.

The Standard Settings are initialized.
NOTE
• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The


Needs
6

Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings

Items that have been changed in the Copy Settings can be returned to their default settings.
key Initialize Copy Settings

Proceed to step 3.
NOTE
• To cancel the initialization of copy settings, press
the [No] key. The display returns to Copy Setting
screen.

Needs
6

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function

(Mail Box Settings)
Setting/ Storing the Box
When using the box, you can set and store each box item beforehand.
NOTE
• A box can store up to 100 items (Box number: 00 to 99).
Additional Functions Box Set/ Store

key Mail Box Settings
2 Press the desired box number.
NOTE
box number.
3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• Enter the password stored under Box Set/Store
setting. This step is not required when setting the
box for the first time or if a password is not stored.
Needs
6
6-46 Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings)
5 Enter the box name, and press the [OK] key.
NOTE
on p. 10-6.
• To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.

Enter the password with the Numeric keys
( 0 - 9 ). Reset
1 2 3
IMPORTANT Guide Start
• Since there is no way to check the password ? 4 5 6

stored, please record the password you stored and Additional Functions
keep it separately. 7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
NOTE ID 0 C
• If no password is stored, proceed to step 7.
• You can delete the number you entered by pressing
Clear
the C key.
7 Set the amount of time to elapse before

received documents are automatically deleted
by pressing the [▼] or [▲] key, and press the
Needs
[OK] key.
NOTE
6
• The default setting is “3 days”.
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) 6-47

Needs
6
Initializing a Box
IMPORTANT
• You cannot initialize a box if there is data remaining in it.
key
2 Select the box that you want to initialize.
NOTE
box number.
3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE
password is not stored, this operation is not
required.
4 Press the [Initialize] key.

Needs
6

The box is initialized.
NOTE
• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key.
7

Needs
6
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function

You can select whether or not to use the Photo Mode in the Mail Box Function. When the Photo
Mode is “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when scanning documents with the
image quality setting.
NOTE
key

key.

Needs
6
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning

You can change the standard mode for when scanning originals into a box. You can also return the
standard mode settings to their defaults.
NOTE
- Document Size: Auto
- Record Size: Auto
- Exposure/ Image quality: A
■ Storing the Standard Settings for Scanning

NOTE
• To change the Standard Settings, Scan settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings
beforehand. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)
key Standard Scan Settings


The settings currently displayed are stored.
NOTE
• The settings displayed here are the currently set
scan settings. Press the [ ▼] or [ ▲] key to display
the scan modes that do not fit in the display area.
Needs
• To cancel storing the currently displayed settings

as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The
6

■ Initializing the Standard mode for Scanning
key
2 Select the [Initialize] key.

3 Check the settings, and press the [Yes] key.
The Standard Settings are initialized.
NOTE
• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The
Needs
6

Needs
6
Setting Specifications of the System Management

ID (System Settings)
Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password
You can set a password for the system manager. If the System Manager ID/ Password is set,
restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.
IMPORTANT
• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, the System Manager ID and the System Password already stored,
will be erased.
NOTE
• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you cannot store the numbers from 1 to 1000 as the Sys-
tem Manager ID.
• For details on how to enter the characters, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” on p.
10-6.
• The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, and comment is 32, and
for a E-mail address is 64.
• The maximum number of numbers you can store for the System Manager ID and Password is seven. If
you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:
- Example: When “321” is entered → “0000321” is stored
Additional Functions System Manager

key

System Settings
Settings
NOTE
• When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password
after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the ID key.
2 Press the [System Manager] key, then enter

the name of the system manager.
NOTE
Needs
6
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings) 6-55

3 Press the [System Manager ID] key, and enter

the number within seven digits with the
Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) as the new System
Manager ID.
NOTE
• You cannot store a System Manager ID with only
the number “0”, such as “0000000”.
• You must set the System Manager ID.
• You can delete the number you entered by pressing
Clear
the C key.
4 Press the [System Password] key, and enter

the number within seven digits with the
Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) as the new System
Password. Then press the [Next] key.
NOTE
• You cannot store a System Password with only the
number “0”, such as “0000000”.
• Press the [Next] key when not setting the System
Password.
• To erase the entered character (number), press
Clear
the C key.
5 Press the [E-mail Address] key, then enter e-

mail address of the system manager.
6 Press the [Contact Information] key, then enter

where to contact the system manager.
Needs
6
6-56 Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)

7 Press the [Comment] key, then enter a com-

ment for the system manager.
8 Once you have completed all settings, press

the [OK] key.

Needs
6

Setting the Department ID Management

By storing a Department ID and Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its
functions can be used only after the correct password has been entered.
This is called “Department ID Management”. Department IDs and Passwords for up to 1000
departments can be stored. This function allows you to check the print totals for each department for
management purposes.
With Department ID Management, the following operations can be performed:
• Setting whether or not to set Department ID Management
• Storing the Department ID and the Password
IMPORTANT
• This function will switch to Card ID Management when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached, and will
automatically manage the Department ID.
• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you do not need to store a password, but you can change the
password.
NOTE
• The maximum number of numbers you can store for the Department ID and Password is seven. If you
store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:
- Example: When “321” is entered → “0000321” is stored
■ Storing the Department ID, Password and Impression Limit

Additional Functions Department

key ID Manage-
NOTE
2 Select whether to use the Department ID Man-

agement function.
Press the [OK] key, then press the [Done] key.
The display returns to the Additional Functions
screen.
● When you select [On] key:
To store the Department ID and Password,
Needs
press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key and

proceed to step 3.
6

4 Press the [Department ID] key and enter the

Department ID with the Numeric keys ( 0 -
9 ).
NOTE
• You cannot store a Department ID with only the
number “0”, such as “0000000”.

Press the [Password] key and enter the pass-
word with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ).
NOTE
• You cannot store a Password with only the number
“0”, such as “0000000”.
• When a password is not stored, you can use this
machine by entering only the Department ID.
6 Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the

impression limit with the Numeric keys ( 0 -
9 ).
NOTE
Needs
• Impression limits can be set from 0 to 999,999.

Printing pages in excess of this limit is not permit-
ted.
6
• Impression limits apply to the number of printed

sides. Printing one sheet of paper on two sides is
counted as two impressions.

8 After setting the printing restrictions, and

press the [Done] key.
NOTE
• To apply printing restrictions, press the [Limit
Impress.] key. The impression limits set in step 6
are enabled.
• To set the print restrictions, the Impression Limit
needs to be specified in step 6.
• It is not possible to enable and disable Limit
Impressions for individual departments.
9
Press the [OK] key.
NOTE
• When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man-
agement is enabled. (See “Entering the Depart-
ment ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.)

Repeat this until the screen on the right appears.
For details on how to enter the Department ID and
Password, see “Entering the Department ID and
Needs
Password,” on p. 10-4.
6

■ Changing the Password and Impression Limit
key
NOTE
• Set the Control Card when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached before proceeding to step 1. (See
“Inserting the Control Card,” on p. 10-2.)
2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept.

ID/Password] key.
NOTE
• You do not need to operate the [On] [Off] key when
the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
Press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key when


3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to display the Pass-
word you want to change. Then select the
Password, and press the [Edit] key.
Needs
6

4 Press the [Password] key and enter the Pass-

\
NOTE
• You cannot store a password with only the number
“0”, such as “0000000”.
5 Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the

impression limit with the Numeric keys ( 0 -
9 ). Then press the [OK] key.
6
When the Card Reader-C1(option) is attached,

you can display the number of restricted sides on
the basic features screen by pressing “Display
Imp. Limit”.
Needs
6

NOTE


■ Erasing the Department ID and Password
IMPORTANT
• You cannot erase the Department ID when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
key
NOTE
2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept.

ID/ Password] key.
Needs
6

3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to display the Depart-

ment you want to erase. Then select the
Department, and press the [Erase] key.

The Department ID and Password are erased.
NOTE
• To cancel erasing, press the [No] key.
5
NOTE
Needs

6


■ Checking and Printing Counter Information

You can display and also print a list of the count of the paper that was used by each department.
key
NOTE

2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals]

key.
NOTE
Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card

Reader-C1 is attached.
Needs
6

3 Check or print the count of print totals.

The print total with the Department ID left blank
(not displayed) is the total of prints from the driver
not correspondent with a stored Department ID
(unknown ID).
● When only checking the counter:
Press the [▼] or [▲] key to display the desired
Department, and check the print totals.
● When printing the displayed list:

Press the [Print List] key.
The screen shown at right appears. Press the

[Yes] key.
NOTE
• If you do not want to print, press the [No] key.
The screen on the right appears during printing.
NOTE
Needs
• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.

• To close the screen, press the [Done] key.
6

NOTE

Needs
6

■ Erasing Print Totals

The following instructions describe how to delete the print totals made so far for all departments.
key
NOTE
2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals]

key.
NOTE
Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card

Reader-C1 is attached.
3 When Calling Your Service Representative.

Needs
6

● When Erasing by Department

Select the Department you want to erase, then
press the [Clear] key.
● When Erasing All Counts

Press the [Clear All Totals] key.
4 Select the [Yes] key.
NOTE

• If you do not want to erase the counter, press the
[No] key.
The message “Erased.” is displayed in the touch

panel display for about two seconds.
Needs
6

NOTE
7

Needs
6

■ Selecting whether or not to Accept Print Jobs of Unknown ID

You can set whether or not to print documents from a driver not correspondent with a stored
Department ID.
NOTE
• The [Accept jobs with unknown ID] key is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.
key
NOTE
2 Select the [On] key.
NOTE


key.
Accepts print job from an unknown ID.
Does not accept print job from an unknown ID. Needs
6


Setting Device Information

You can set the name of this machine and the place where it is located.
Additional Functions Device Informa-

key tion Settings
NOTE
2 Press the [Device Name] and [Location] keys,

then enter the name of this machine and the
location where this machine is placed. Then
press the [OK] key.
NOTE
on p. 10-6.
• The maximum number of character which can be
entered is 32.
3
Needs

6

Erasing a Message Board

A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are
sent from the system manager using the utility software. You can erase a message displayed in the
message board.
NOTE
• The message board is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.
key
NOTE
2 Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

● When you select the [Yes] key:
The message is not displayed.
● When you select the [No] key:
The message remains displayed.

Needs
6

Setting the Auto Offline On/Off

When the network is online, scanning is not possible with the Copy or Mail Box functions. By setting
Auto Offline is to "ON", the machine will automatically go Offline.
NOTE
• Auto Offline is only displayed when the Network Scan function is enabled.
• The default setting is "Off".
key
NOTE

key.
NOTE
• If Auto Offline is set to “ON”, the machine automati-
cally goes offline with time set by Auto Clear. If
Auto Clear Time is set to “None” (0), the machine
will go Offline after approximately 2 minutes.

Needs
6

Printing the Report

Printing the Contents of the Network Settings
NOTE
• For details of the contents of the User’s Data List, see the Network Guide.
• You can print the contents only when the network printer function is enabled.
key Report Settings User’s Data List
NOTE
• When you do not want to print, press the [No] key.

The screen on the right appears during the report
printing.
NOTE
• To cancel the report print, press the [Cancel] key.
• To close the screen, press the [Done] key.

Needs
6
Printing the Report 6-75

Needs
6
6-76 Printing the Report

Loading Paper and Adding

Toner
This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.
7
CH APTER
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Consumables and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7
7-1
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers.
IMPORTANT
• When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
NOTE
• The following size paper can be loaded in the paper drawers:
- Paper drawer 1, 2 : LTR
- Paper drawer 3, 4 : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
• For details of available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers, see “Available Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers

When the selected paper has run out, or the selected
paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the
display prompting you to load paper appears.
CAUTION
• When loading paper, take care not to cut your
hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT
• The message will also appear if the selected paper
drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Prop-
erly insert the paper drawer.
NOTE
• You can check the amount of paper remaining in
the paper drawer by looking at the remaining paper
quantity display on the front of the paper drawer.
• If the above message appears during printing, the
remaining prints will automatically be made after
you load paper. When you select other feeding
position, the remaining prints will be made after you
press the [OK] key.
• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.
7
7-2 Loading Paper

1 Press, then release the paper drawer release

button of the paper drawer in which you want
to load paper.
2 Grip the handle and pull out the paper drawer

until it stops.
NOTE
• If the drawer seems to be stuck halfway, do not pull

it out by force. Push it back into the copier, and
then try pressing the release button and pulling it
out again.
Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-3

3 Open a package of paper, and remove the

paper stack.
IMPORTANT
• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original pack-
age, and store it in a dry place away from direct
sunlight.
• Do not copy on the following types of paper stock.
Doing so may cause a paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper.
- Transparencies.
- Paper on which color images have been copied.
- Paper which has been copied on using a digital
full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal
transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
NOTE
• Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold up to about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold up to about 550 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.
4 Turn the paper stack over, and place it in the

paper drawer.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the
paper stack against the right wall of the paper
drawer.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it
in the paper drawer.
not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper
drawer.
• Make sure that the paper size setting in the paper
drawer matches the size of paper to be loaded.
NOTE
• When loading paper in the paper drawer 3 for the
7
first time, set the size plate of the paper loaded in

the paper drawer.
• For details of print direction of papers already
printed with logos or patterns, see “Relation of
Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on
p. 11-9.
7-4 Loading Paper

5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the

machine until it clicks.
CAUTION
• When returning the paper drawer to its original
position, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Never place paper or any other items in the open
part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack.
Doing so may cause paper jams.
NOTE
• When paper runs out during printing, load paper,
and follow the instructions in the touch panel dis-
play. The machine automatically restarts the
remaining print.

7

Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size

If you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to
adjust the paper drawer guides.
You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper size: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/
LTRR/ STMTR.
IMPORTANT
• The paper size loaded in the paper drawer 3 can be changed.
• The paper sizes loaded in the paper drawer 4 can be changed by your service representative. For more
details, contact your service representative.
• When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
1 Squeeze the lever on the length guide as

shown in the figure and slide the length guide
to align it with the mark for the desired paper
size.
Adjusting a Paper
Drawer
Length guide
When loading 11"x17"-size paper, slide the length
guide all the way to the left, and drop it downward.
7
7-6 Loading Paper

2 Squeeze the lever on the width guide as

shown in the illustration. Without releasing the
lever, slide the width guide to align it with the
mark for the desired paper size.
IMPORTANT
• If the length and width guides are not adjusted
properly for the paper size loaded in the paper
drawer, then the correct paper sizes might not
appear in the display. Not adjusting the guides cor-
rectly might cause paper jams, dirty prints or make
the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these
problems from occurring, make certain that the Width guide
guides are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper
size.
3 Change the paper drawer’s size plate so that it

matches the new paper size that you loaded.

7

Adding Toner
When there is only a small amount of toner remain-
ing, the message to the right appears in the display.
Prints can still be made, but at this time you should
purchase new toner so that you have it on hand
when it is needed.
WARNING
• Never dispose of the waste toner in a fire or
incinerator. Doing so may result in an explo-
sion.
NOTE
• When this message appears, approximately 300
prints can still be made (LTR-size Canon Standard
Chart). However, since this number may vary
depending upon the original, it is recommended
that the toner be added as soon as possible.
When the toner has run out and prints can no longer
be made, the message describing how to add toner
appears in the display. Add toner following the
described procedure.
IMPORTANT
• The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed
until you press the [Recover Later/Done] key.
• Use only the toner bottle recommended for use on
this machine.
• Never add more than one bottle of toner.
• Add toner after the “Add toner” message is dis-
played.
NOTE
• You can check how to add toner by pressing the
[Previous] or [Next] key on the screen.
• If the toner runs out during a print job, the remain-
ing prints will be made after you add toner.
7
7-8 Adding Toner

1 Open the toner supply cover.
2 Hold the toner bottle with both hands and turn

it up and down a few times as shown in the
illustration, to evenly distribute the toner
inside the bottle.
3 Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with

the slots on the toner supply port. Gently
press the toner bottle down onto the toner

supply port until you hear a click.
The toner bottle is now locked onto the toner
supply port.
4 Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one

hand, and pull out the black shutter of the
toner supply port as far as it will go.
7

5 Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it

out slowly until it stops.
Toner flows into the toner box.
6 Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make

sure that all of the toner empties into the toner
box.
7 Push back the shutter of the toner bottle.

8 Make sure you hear a click when the black

shutter of the toner supply port has been
pushed back in as far as the position.
7
When the toner bottle starts to come loose from

the toner supply port, lightly hold it so that it does
not fall over.
CAUTION
• Never try to remove the toner bottle before you
hear the click, doing so can damage the toner
supply port.
7-10 Adding Toner

9 Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner

supply port.
WARNING
• Do not throw used toner bottles into open
flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining
inside the bottle and result in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
• When removing used toner bottles from the
toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully
to prevent toner from scattering and entering
your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or
mouth, wash immediately with cold water and
consult a physician.
10 Close the toner supply cover.

NOTE
• Press the [Recover Later/Done] key to close the
screen prompting you to add toner.

11 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.

Consumables and Options

The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For details, consult your ser-
vice representative.
Consumables
■ Paper stock
In addition to plain paper (11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/
STMT), transparencies, labels and other types of
paper stock are available. For details, consult your
service representative.
CAUTION
• Do not store paper in places exposed to open
flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite
and result in burns or a fire.
IMPORTANT
• For high-quality print output, we recommend using
paper recommended by Canon.
• To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining
paper tightly wrapped in its original package.
■ Black toner
When the “Add toner” message appears in the touch

panel display, add toner which has been approved for
use with this machine. Only black toner can be used
with this machine.
WARNING
• Never dispose of waste toner in a fire or incin-
erator. Doing so may result in an explosion.
CAUTION
• Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to
open flames, as this may cause the toner to
ignite and result in burns or a fire.
7
IMPORTANT
• Store toner bottles in a cool location away from
direct sunlight. (The recommended storage condi-
tions: temperature below 86°F, and humidity below
80%.)
7-12 Consumables and Options

■ Genuine supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured parts,
supplies and GPR-4 Toner specifically for use in this
machine. As such, for superior print quality, we
recommend that you use Canon-GENUINE brand
parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner in this machine.
Ask your authorized Canon dealer or service
provider for Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies
and GPR-4 Toner.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner

from your service representative before they run out.
Options
Cassette
The paper drawer can be adjusted to hold the
paper size you want to load. For instructions on
how to adjust paper drawers for paper sizes, see
“Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different
Paper Size,” on p. 7-6.
You can adjust the paper drawer for the following
paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR.

7

Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
8
CH APTER
Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Troubleshooting
8
8-1
Removing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the following display appears in the touch panel display.
Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam

The display indicating the location of the paper jam appears in the touch panel display, followed by
instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will repeatedly appear in the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
● Example of display indicating the location of the
paper jam.
■ When you select the [Recover Later] key:
You can continue operations such as mode set-
tings or scannings even when jammed paper is Paper Jams
not removed.
IMPORTANT
• When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot
continue the operation. Follow the directions in the
display to remove the jammed paper.
● Example of display indicating how to clear the
paper jam.
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
original or paper.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-
8
laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your
hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with
warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper
gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner
enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
8-2 Removing Paper Jams

1 Inspect all areas which appear in the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper.
See the appropriate pages for instructions on how to find and remove jammed paper.
● Display indicating locations of the paper jam and page number describing how to remove
jammed paper.
Feeder (See p. 8-22.)
Exit slot
Remove the protruding Paper drawer 1 (See p. 8-12.)
jammed paper.
Stack bypass (See p. 8-20.)
Right cover (See p. 8-10.)
Main unit
(See p. 8-5.)
Paper drawer 3 or 4
(See p. 8-18.)
Paper drawer 2 (See p. 8-15.)
IMPORTANT
• If a jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the
machine.
2 If a paper jam occurs within the optional units, see the description on the pages for each
option.
● Finisher-F1, Saddle Finisher-F2, ● Paper Deck-G1

Puncher Unit-B1 (See p. 9-13, p. 9-29.) (See p. 9-4.)
Troubleshooting
8
● Copy Tray-C3
(See p. 9-35.)
Removing Paper Jams 8-3

3 After you have removed all paper jams at the locations indicated in the touch panel dis-
play, restore all levers and covers to their original positions.
4 Continue operations following the instructions displayed in the touch panel display.
● If there is remaining paper to be removed:
The display indicating how to clear the paper jam appears in the touch panel display.
Repeat the procedure from step 1.
NOTE
• Once you have cleared the paper jam in locations other than the Feeder, print operation restarts.
Troubleshooting
8

Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit

If a paper jam occurs in the main unit, a display
similar to the one on the right appears in the touch
panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and
follow the procedure below and the procedure that
appears in the touch panel display to remove the
jammed paper.
1 Open the front cover of the main unit.
2 Move the green lever in the direction of the

arrow.
Troubleshooting
3
8
Grip the lever and pull out the fixing unit.

The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out
together.

4 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the

fixing unit.
5 Open the left cover.
6 Turn the green knob in the direction of the

arrow, and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
• The parts located around the cover are subject
to high temperatures. When removing jammed
Troubleshooting
paper, take care not to touch anything in this

area except this cover.
7 Turn the duplexing unit knob in the direction

8
of the arrow displayed on the screen, and

remove any jammed paper.

8 Close the cover.
CAUTION
• When closing the cover, be careful not to get
your fingers caught, as this may result in per-
sonal injury.
9 Gently push the fixing unit back into its origi-

nal position.
CAUTION
• When returning the fixing unit to its original
10 Return the green lever to its original position.
Troubleshooting
11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the

8
duplexing unit.

12 Remove any jammed paper while opening the

left cover as shown in the illustration.
13 Remove any jammed paper while opening the

right cover as shown in the illustration.
14 Open the duplexing transport unit, and

remove any jammed papers.
Troubleshooting
15 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its

8
original position.
CAUTION
• When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-
nal position, be careful not to get your fingers

16 Remove all jammed papers, and close the

front cover.
CAUTION
sonal injury.

(See “Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.)
Troubleshooting
8

Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover

If a paper jam occurs in the right cover, a display
jammed paper.
NOTE
• When the Paper Deck-G1 (option) is attached,
move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See
“Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 9-3.)
1 Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
2 Remove any jammed paper.

Troubleshooting
8
3 Close the right cover (upper).
CAUTION
sonal injury.

4 Open the right cover (lower) of the main unit.
6 Close the right cover (lower).
CAUTION
sonal injury.
Troubleshooting

8

Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 1, a display
jammed paper.
NOTE

Troubleshooting
8
3 Close the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
CAUTION
sonal injury.


button of the paper drawer indicated on the
touch panel display until the paper drawer
comes out.
5 Pull out the paper drawer 1.
NOTE
out again.
Troubleshooting
7 Return the paper drawer to its original posi-

tion.
8
CAUTION
position, be careful not to catch your fingers
between the edge of the paper drawer and the
main unit.


Troubleshooting
8

Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 2, a display
jammed paper.
1 Open the front cover of the main unit.
2 Turn the green knob in the direction of the

arrow so as to feed the jammed paper to the
duplexing unit.
Troubleshooting
3
8
Gently pull out the duplexing unit.

4 Open the duplexing transport unit, and

remove any jammed paper.
5 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its

original position.
CAUTION
• When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-
nal position, be careful not to get your fingers
6 Close the front cover of the main unit.
CAUTION
sonal injury.
Troubleshooting

button of the paper drawer indicated on the
8

comes out.

8 Pull out the paper drawer 2.
NOTE
out again.

tion.
CAUTION
between the edge of the paper drawer and the
Troubleshooting
main unit.

8

Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 3 or 4, a
display similar to the one on the right appears in the
touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred,
and follow the procedure below and the procedure
that appears in the touch panel display to remove the
jammed paper.

button of the paper drawer indicated in the
comes out.
2 Pull out the paper drawer.
NOTE
Troubleshooting
out again.

8


tion.
CAUTION
• When returning the paper drawer to the original
between the top of the paper drawer and the
main unit.

Troubleshooting
8

Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass

If a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a display
jammed paper.
NOTE
2 Remove all paper from the stack bypass.

Troubleshooting
8

4 Close the right cover (upper).
CAUTION
sonal injury.

Troubleshooting
8

Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder

If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a display similar
to the one on the right appears in the touch panel
display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow
the procedure below and the procedure that appears
in the touch panel display to remove the jammed
paper.
1 Open the upper cover of the feeder.
2 Remove any jammed original.

Troubleshooting
3
8
Open the middle cover holding the knob in the

back.

4 Remove the jammed original.
5 Close the middle cover.
CAUTION
sonal injury.
6 Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow,

then remove the jammed original.
Troubleshooting
7 Once you have removed the entire jammed

8
original, close the upper cover of the feeder.
CAUTION
sonal injury.

8 Open the feeder, and remove any jammed

paper.
9 Close the feeder.

Troubleshooting
8

Routine Cleaning
If the original is not scanned clearly, clean the following parts. For high-quality outputs, we recom-
mend cleaning them once or twice a month.
• Platen glass
• Rear side of platen glass
• Feeder Scanning area
• White plate, Roller
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Fail-
ure to observe these items may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so might result in
plastic parts becoming deformed.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of
the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result
in a fire.
• Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.
Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass

Clean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass following the procedure below.
IMPORTANT
• If the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass is dirty, the original may not be scanned cleanly, or the
size of the original may be detected incorrectly.
■ Cleaning the Platen Glass
Troubleshooting
Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened
with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. 8
Routine Cleaning 8-25

■ Cleaning the Rear Side of Platen Glass
Clean the rear side of platen glass with a cloth

dampened with water, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
Cleaning the Feeder

Clean the feeder scanning area, white plate, and roller following the procedure below.
IMPORTANT
• If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or dirty print output.
• Spin the roller while cleaning it.
1 Open the feeder cover.

Troubleshooting
2 Clean the roller (total of 8 places) at the rear

side of the feeder cover with a cloth dampened
with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
8
8-26 Routine Cleaning

3 Clean the roller (total of 3 places) as shown in

the illustration with a cloth dampened with
water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
4 Open the middle cover holding the knob in the

back.
5 Clean the roller (total of 5 places) with a cloth

cloth.
Troubleshooting
6 Clean the roller (total of 4 places) with a cloth

8

cloth.

7 Close the middle cover.
CAUTION
sonal injury.
8 Close the feeder cover.
CAUTION
sonal injury.
9 Open the feeder.

Troubleshooting
10 Clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth

8

cloth.

11 Clean the white plate with a cloth dampened

with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the white plate hard since the white
plate is soft.
12 Close the feeder.
Troubleshooting
8

Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder

Cleaning)
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them in the feeder caused by the
pencil powder etc. on the roller, perform the Feeder Cleaning.
Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank papers though the feeder.
NOTE
• The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [ ▲] keys to scroll to the
• It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder.
key Feeder Cleaning
2 Place 10 blank LTR-size paper in the feeder,

then press the [Start] key.
NOTE
• To cancel Feeder Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
When the feeder is being cleaned, the message

on the right appears in the touch panel display.
Troubleshooting
8


Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)

If dirt appears on printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assemblies as the need arises.
NOTE
• It takes about 30 seconds to clean the wire.
Additional Functions Wire Cleaning

key
NOTE
• To cancel Wire Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
While wire cleaning is being performed, the

message to the right appears in the touch panel
display.
Troubleshooting
8

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display

Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear in the touch panel display at the following times:
• When printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
• When you need to make a judgment or take some action during scanning or printing.
If a self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
Message/ Cause Remedy
Add paper.
The machine has run out of paper. No more prints Load paper.
can be made. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2.)
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted. Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go.
(See “Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2.)
Load LTR-size paper.
The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer.
Start
selected by the Automatic Paper selection is not If you press the key while this message is
inserted into the machine. displayed, print will be made with the currently
selected paper size.
If the message remains even when the indicated

paper is loaded, set the Drawer Eligibility of that
paper drawer to On . (See “Setting a Paper
Troubleshooting
Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer

Switching,” on p. 6-10.)
Return page 1 to the top, and then

press the Start key.
8
Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Arrange the originals in page order with the first
Feeder. page on top. Place the originals back in the Feeder
Start
original supply tray, then press the key.
8-32 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display

Remove the paper from the output tray.
Prints from the previous job remain in the output Remove the prints from the output tray, then press
Start
tray. the key.
Attach the finisher to the main unit.
The Finisher is not properly connected to the main Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly.
unit.
Paper is jammed in the indicated

location. Remove the jammed paper.
An original jam or paper jam has occurred, Remove paper from the machine following the
preventing you from making prints. guidance messages in the touch panel display.
(See “Removing Paper Jams,” on p. 8-2.)
Add toner.
There is not enough toner to print. Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for
use on this machine.
(See “Adding Toner,” on p. 7-8.)
Troubleshooting
8
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display 8-33

Place the original on the platen glass.
There is no original on the platen glass. The Place the originals on the platen glass.
programed function (mode) requires the original to
be placed in the feeder.
Remove the original from the platen glass.
The original remains on the platen glass. Remove the original from the platen glass, then
place the original again.
Remove the original from the feeder.
Original is placed both in the feeder and on the Remove the original from the feeder.
platen glass with the mode which the original
cannot be placed in the feeder set.
Troubleshooting
8
8-34 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display

If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning

If memory becomes full during scanning of originals, the following messages appear on the touch-
panel display.
NOTE
• The machine’s memory can hold about 3,700 originals (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart, Standard set-
ting) scanned in standard mode.
If the message asking whether to print the

original pages scanned into memory appears,
select the [Yes] or [No] key as appropriate.
● When you select the [Yes] key:
Pages in memory are printed, and remaining
originals are then scanned.
● When you select the [No] key:
Pages in memory are not printed.
When processing is completed, the display
returns to the Basic Features screen.
If the screen displayed on the right appears,

press the [Cancel] key to return to the Basic
Features screen.
Troubleshooting
8
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning 8-35

When the Power does not Turn ON

If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch
and control panel switch are both ON, be sure to check the breaker on the main unit to see if it is
OFF.
If the breaker has gone OFF, do not turn it ON. Instead, contact your service representative.
WARNING
• If the breaker is OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker back ON. Doing so may
lead to a fire, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility.
(I Side)
( Side)
Troubleshooting
8
8-36 When the Power does not Turn ON

Service Call Message

If a malfunction occurs and the machine will not
operate as normal, the message on the right (the
service call message) will appear in the touch panel
display.
If this message appears, follow the procedure described below.
WARNING
• Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this
could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
• If you turn the main power switch OFF when there is a reserved print job, that job will be erased.
1 Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least

10 seconds before turning the main power
switch back ON.
Troubleshooting
8
Service Call Message 8-37

2 If the machine still does not operate normally,

carry out the following procedure, then con-
tact your service representative:
Turn the main power switch OFF.
Unplug the power cable from the outlet.

Troubleshooting
8
8-38 Service Call Message

Handling Options
This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional
unit.
9
CH APTER
Handling Options
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Paper Deck-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9-1
System Configuration
The following options can be attached to the machine.
NOTE
• Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective film from the display.
Handling Options
Saddle Finisher-F2
Main Unit Control Card IVN

9
Card Reader-C1
Paper Deck-G1
Finisher-F1
Copy Tray-C3 Puncher Unit-B1
9-2 System Configuration

Paper Deck-G1
If you attach the Paper Deck-G1 to the machine, one extra size of paper can be used in addition to
the paper sizes in the paper drawers of the main unit.
Up to 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) of paper can be loaded in the paper deck.
IMPORTANT
Handling Options
Energy Saver
• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the key
and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the
Energy Saver
key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.
NOTE
• Paper size of the Paper Deck is fixed to LTR.
9
Release Lever
Press to remove the Paper Deck from the Main Unit.
Open button
Press to load paper or to check for a paper jam.
Paper Supply indicator

Enables you to check the amount of paper
remaining in the Paper Deck.
Paper Deck
Max. 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be
stacked.
Paper Deck-G1 9-3

Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck

If a paper jam occurs in the Paper Deck-G1, a
display similar to the one on the right appears in the
touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred,
and follow the procedure below and the procedure
that appears in the touch panel display to remove the
jammed paper.
Handling Options
CAUTION
9
original or paper.
1 Press the release lever to remove the Paper

Deck from the main unit.
9-4 Paper Deck-G1

3 Press the Open button to open the Paper

Deck.
IMPORTANT
• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the
Energy Saver
touch panel is not displayed, and only the
key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may
Handling Options
not be able to open the paper deck. In this case,
Energy Saver
press the key beforehand to reactivate the
machine, then press the Open button.
9
5 Close the Paper Deck and reconnect it to the
main unit.
CAUTION
• When reconnecting the Paper Deck to the main
unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.

Paper Deck-G1 9-5

Loading Paper in the Paper Deck
1 Press the Open button to open the Paper

Deck.
IMPORTANT
• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the
Handling Options
Energy Saver
touch panel is not displayed, and only the
key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may
not be able to open the paper deck. In this case,
Energy Saver
press the key beforehand to reactivate the
machine, then press the Open button.
2
9
Open a package of paper, and remove the

paper stack (Make sure that the seam on the
center of the package is face up).
CAUTION
• When loading paper, take care not to cut your
hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original pack-
age, and store it in a dry place away from direct
sunlight.
• Do not copy on the following types of paper stock.
Doing so may cause a paper jam.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper.
- Transparencies.
- Paper which has been copied on using a digital
full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal
transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side
either).
NOTE
• The Paper Deck holds up to about 3,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.
9-6 Paper Deck-G1

3 Place it in the paper deck.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it
in the paper drawer.
not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper
Handling Options
drawer.
4 Close the Paper Deck.
9
CAUTION
• When returning the Paper Deck to its original
NOTE
• For details of print direction of paper already
printed with logos or patterns, see “Relation of
Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on
p. 11-9.
Paper Deck-G1 9-7

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1

Upper cover
Open to removed jamed paper. (See “Removing
Paper Jams in the Finisher,” on p. 9-13.)
Handling Options
Top cover of the puncher unit

Open this cover when a paper jam
occurs in the puncher unit. (See
“Removing Paper Jams in the
Tray A Puncher Unit,” on p. 9-29.)
Front cover of the puncher unit

Output Tray
9
Open this cover when a paper jam

Papers are output to
occurs in the puncher unit, or when
these trays. You can
removing the punch waste. (See
assign the trays so
“Removing Paper Jams in the
that the output of a Tray B Puncher Unit,” on p. 9-29, “Remov-
specified function is
ing Punch Waste,” on p. 9-32.)
output to a desig-
nated tray.
Front cover (upper)
Open this cover to replace the
staple case in the staple unit, or
when a staple jam occurs. (See
“Replacing the Staple Case in the
Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-15, “Remov-
ing Jammed Staples from the
Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-18.)
Front cover (lower)

Open this cover when a paper
jam or staple jam occurs in the
saddle stitcher unit, or when
Finisher-F1
Saddle Finisher-F2 replacing the saddle stitcher unit
Puncher Unit-B1 staple cartridge. (See “Removing
Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher
Booklet tray Unit,” on p. 9-21, “Replacing the
The paper that is folded and stapled at Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Car-
the center to form a booklet is delivered tridge,” on p. 9-24, and “Removing
to this tray. Jammed Staples from the Saddle
* Only available in the Saddle Finisher- Stitcher Unit,” on p. 9-26.)
F2. * Only available in the Saddle Fin-
isher-F2.
*This illustration shows the Saddle Finisher-F2 with the Puncher Unit-B1 attached to it.
* In the description on the following pages Finisher-F1 and Saddle Finisher-F2 are referred to
collectively as “Finisher” unless otherwise stated.
9-8 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1

Collate Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order before they are delivered.
Group Mode
This function outputs all prints of the same page in one set and slightly shifts the output position of
Handling Options
print sets to make them easier to handle.
NOTE
• When the Collate or Group mode is set, the tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When
the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the paper is automatically delivered to another
acceptable tray. When the paper reaches the stacking limit of all of the acceptable trays, printing stops
temporarily. After you remove the delivered paper from the tray, the tray moves up the corresponding dis-
9
tance and printing of the remaining sets restarts.
Offset Mode
This function outputs papers shifted to the front.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot set the Offset mode when printing on STMTR-size paper.
NOTE
• These functions shift each set of output paper about 1-1/4" (30 mm) before delivery, when the Collate
function or Group function has been set, and copies are made or prints output from a computer.
Staple Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order, staples the sets, and outputs them.
CAUTION
• Do not put your hand in the tray’s stapling area when the machine is equipped with the Finisher.
Doing so may result in injury.
IMPORTANT
• The tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking
limit of the tray, the printing stops temporarily. Remove all the paper on the tray, and the remaining printing
and stapling will restart.
NOTE
• If the number of sheets in one set exceeds 30 (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 (for LTR size), stapling
will not be performed. Only the Collating will be performed.
• If the machine stops during stapling and a message is displayed, it means that almost all of the staples
have been used up and the staple cartridge must be replaced. Replace the staple cartridge in this case.
(See “Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-15.)
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-9

Copies are stapled at the following places.
● When an original is placed on the platen glass:
● Corner staple area ● Double staple area

Upper left
CBA CBA
Upper right
Left side
Handling Options
Lower right
Lower left Right side
Upper left
CBA CBA
Upper right
9
Left side
Lower right
● When originals are placed in the Feeder:
● Corner staple area ● Double staple area
Upper right
ABC
Upper left ABC
Lower right
Left side
Upper right
ABC ABC
Upper left
Right side
Lower left
Lower right Left side
IMPORTANT
• You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, and labels.
• You cannot corner-staple STMTR-size paper.
• You cannot double-staple LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper.

Saddle Stitching Mode

This function enables you to make booklets consisting of pages folded and stapled at the center.
Originals Copy
Saddle stitch
Handling Options
The pages are folded with
a roller to form a booklet.
1
2
3
4
2
7
9
8 1
8 1
4
5
6 3 6 3
5
6
7
8
IMPORTANT
• This function is only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2.
• The maximum number of sheets that can be bound is 15 (60 pages).
• The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 11"x17" and LTRR.

Punch Mode
This function punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets.
● The hole punched area is as shown in the illustration.
● Platen glass ● Feeder

Handling Options
CBA
Hole punched ABC

area Hole punched
area
9
CBA
Hole punched ABC

area Hole punched
area
IMPORTANT
• The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper
size.
- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR
• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers labels and 3-hole punch.
NOTE
• This function is only available when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.
● The distance between the punch holes is as shown in the illustration.
4-1/4" 4-1/4" 2-3/4"

(108 mm) (108 mm) (70 mm)
3 holes 2 holes

Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher

If a paper jam occurs using the Finisher, a display
jammed paper.
Handling Options
CAUTION
9
original or paper.
1 Remove any paper protruding from the output

tray.
IMPORTANT
• When making prints with the Staple mode, do not
remove the output sheets not yet stapled. (Stapling
will be performed after removing the jammed
paper.)
2 Open the top cover and check the inside of the

Finisher.

3 Lift cover 1 upward, and remove any jammed

paper. Then, return cover 1 to its original posi-
tion.
CAUTION
Handling Options
sonal injury.
4 Lift cover 2 upward, and remove any jammed

paper.
9
NOTE
• When you pull up cover 2, cover 1 is pulled up
together with it.
5 Return cover 2, and close the top cover.
CAUTION
sonal injury.


Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit

When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple
case must be replaced. The message on the right will
appear in the touch panel display. Follow the
procedure described below to replace the staple
case.
Handling Options
1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher
9
2 Push down the green lever.
The staple cartridge will slightly come out.
3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold-

ing it by its left and right sides.

4 Pull out the empty staple case holding it by its

left and right sides.
NOTE
• Place the staple cartridge as shown in the illustra-
tion, then pull out the staple case.
Handling Options
5 Insert the new staple case.
NOTE
9
• Only one staple case can be inserted at a time.

• Use only the special staple case for use on this
machine.
6 Remove the seal fixing the staples by pulling it

straight out.
7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the

Finisher until the green lever returns to its
original position.

8 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly

secured, then close the front cover (upper) of
the Finisher.
CAUTION
Handling Options
sonal injury.
NOTE
• When you close the cover, the staple unit automati-
cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several
times to reposition the staples.

Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit

If a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right
appears. Follow the procedure described below to
remove any jammed staples.
Handling Options
1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.

9
2 Push down the green lever.

The staple cartridge will slightly come out.
3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold-

ing it by its left and right sides.

4 Lower the knob of the staple cartridge.
Handling Options
5 Remove all of the staples that slide from the
staple case.
9
6 Return the knob of the staple cartridge to its
original position.
7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the

Finisher until the green lever returns to its
original position.

8 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly

secured, then close the front cover (upper) of
the Finisher.
CAUTION
Handling Options
sonal injury.
NOTE
• When you close the cover, the staple unit automati-
cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several
times to reposition the staples.
9

Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit

If a paper jam occurs when the booklet mode was set
using Saddle Finisher-F2, the screen shown at right
appears. Remove the jammed paper according to
the instructions on the screen.
NOTE
Handling Options
• This procedure is only required when Saddle Fin-
isher-F2 is attached.
CAUTION
9
original or paper.
1 Move the Saddle Finisher-F2 away from the

main unit, holding the section indicated in the
figure on the right.
2 Remove the paper in the stack.

3 Connect the Saddle Finisher-F2 to the main

unit.
CAUTION
• When returning the Finisher to its original posi-
tion, be careful not to catch your fingers
between the edge of the Finisher and the main
Handling Options
unit.
4 Open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.

9
5 Turn the knob on the right.
6 Turn the knob on the left while pressing it.

Handling Options
8 Close the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.
9
CAUTION
sonal injury.


Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge

When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple
cartridge must be replaced. The screen on the right
will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the
procedure described below to replace the staple
cartridge.
NOTE
Handling Options
• This procedure is only required when the Saddle Fin-


9
2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.
3 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit,

then push it up.

4 Pull out the empty staple cartridge holding it

by its left and right sides.
Handling Options
5 Insert the new staple cartridge.
9
IMPORTANT
• Replace both the inner and outer staple cartridges
at the same time.

then return it to its original position.
7 Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close

the front cover (lower).
CAUTION
sonal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Once you have removed the jammed staples, be
sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher
unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Saddle Fin-
isher,” on p. 6-32.)

Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit

If a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right
appears. Follow the procedure described below to
remove any jammed staples.
NOTE
• This procedure is only required when the Saddle Fin-
Handling Options

9
2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.

then push it up.

4 Grasp the left and right ends of the staple car-

tridge, and remove the cartridge.
Handling Options
5 Push down part A, then pull up knob B.
9
B
6 Remove the jammed staples, then return knob

B to its original position.
7 Return the staple cartridge to its original posi-

tion.


then return it to its original position.
Handling Options
9 Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close

the front cover (lower).
9
CAUTION
sonal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Once you have removed the jammed staples, be
sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher
unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Saddle Fin-
isher,” on p. 6-32.)

Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit

When paper jams occur while the punch function is
being used, the screen on the right is displayed. In
addition to removing the paper jam in the main unit,
also check the puncher unit with the following
procedure and remove any jammed paper.
NOTE
Handling Options
• This procedure is only required when the Puncher
Unit-B1 is attached.
CAUTION
9
original or paper.
1 Open the front cover of the puncher unit.
2 Align the ▲ of the knob to the range of .

3 Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
sonal injury.
Handling Options
4 Open the top cover of the puncher unit.

9
6 Close the top cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
sonal injury.


Handling Options
9

Removing Punch Waste

When the punch waste tray becomes full with debris,
the screen on the right appear in the display. Follow
the procedure described below to remove the punch
waste.
NOTE
Handling Options
• This procedure is only required when the Puncher

Unit-B1 is attached.
1 Open the front cover of the puncher unit.

9
2 Pull out the punch waste tray.
3 Discard the punch waste.

4 Return the punch waste tray to its original

position.
NOTE
• If the tray is not returned securely in place, you
cannot make prints with the Punch mode selected.
Handling Options
5 Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
9
CAUTION
sonal injury.
Consumables
■ Staple cartridge
Use only the staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine. There is a space behind
the front cover (upper) for storing staple cartridges (equivalent to the space occupied by three
staple unit staple cartridges).
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your service representative before they
run out.

Copy Tray-C3
The Copy Tray-C3 is equipped with the following functions:
● Collate
● Group
● Rotate
Handling Options
IMPORTANT
• The paper size which can be selected when you set the Rotate mode are LTR/ LTRR.

9
Copy Tray-C3
Papers are output here.
NOTE
• Adjust the auxiliary tray depending on the print paper
size.
9-34 Copy Tray-C3

Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3

If a paper jam occurs in the Copy Tray-C3, a display
jammed paper.
Handling Options
CAUTION
9
original or paper.
Pull out the protruding paper from the exit

slot.
Copy Tray-C3 9-35

Operation When User Restrictions are

Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet
Characters
10 CH APTER
This chapter describes operations when user restrictions are enabled, the character entry
method, etc.
Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
How to Enter Alphabet Characters

Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Operations after Using Copy Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Entering Special Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Setting in Inches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10
10-1
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled

Inserting the Control Card
When the Control Card IVN or Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached to the machine, you must insert
the control card before operating this machine.
IMPORTANT
• When the Basic Features screen does not appear in the touch panel display even if the control card is
inserted, check the followings:
- Make sure that the control card is inserted in the correct direction.
- Make sure that the control card is inserted as far as it can go.
- Make sure that an unusable control card is not inserted.
NOTE
• For details on how to handle the Control Card IVN, see the Control Card Instruction Manual.
• For details on how to change the password and how to check, print, and erase the counting information
with Card Reader-C1, see “Setting the Department ID Management,” on p. 6-58.

• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you can use the following two cards: The optical type card can
manage up to 200 departments, and the magnetic type card can manage up to 3000 departments. The
maximum number of departments that can be managed, depends on the main unit. The imageRUNNER
5000 can manage up to 1000 departments.
CONTROL CARD III

Card Reader-C1
CONTROL CARD
123
123
001
Magnetic type card Optical type Card

10
10-2 Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled

Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions

NOTE
• For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.
1 Insert the control card into the card slot mak-

ing sure it is facing the correct direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the Control Card IVN is attached, check if
there is a reserved copy job in the System Monitor

screen. If you remove the control card, the
Control Card
reserved copy job will be canceled.
• When you reserve or interrupt a job with Control
Card IVN attached, do not remove the control card.
If you remove the control card, the reserved copy
job will be canceled.

2 The basic screen of the selected function is
displayed.
10
Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions
After you finish using this machine, remove

the control card.
The touch panel display returns to the screen for
inserting the control card.
IMPORTANT
• After a control card is removed, it must be inserted
again before operating the machine.
• If you reserved a job with Control Card IVN
attached, do not remove the control card until that
job is completed.
• When using the control card, we recommend
checking if there is a reserved copy job in the Sys-
tem Monitor screen.
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled 10-3

Entering the Department ID and Password

When Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and Password must be
entered before operating this machine.
NOTE
• When you are using the control card, the message “You must insert a control card.” appears in the touch
panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See “Inserting the Control Card,” on p. 10-2.)
Operations after Turning the Power ON

NOTE
• For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.
1
Press the [Department ID] key, and enter

the Department ID with the Numeric keys
( 0 - 9 ).
NOTE
Clear
the C key, and enter the values again.
2 Press the [Password] key, and enter the pass-

10
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password,
Clear
press the C key, and enter the password again.
• If a password has not been set, proceed to step 3.
10-4 Entering the Department ID and Password

3 Press the ID key.

Reset
1 2 3
Guide
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
ID 0 C

4 The basic screen of the selected function is
displayed.
NOTE
• If the Department ID and/or Password that you

entered are wrong, the message “Wrong ID or
password” appears. Repeat the procedure from
step 1.
Operations after Using Copy Functions
When operating is completed, press the ID

key on the control panel. Reset
10
1 2 3
The screen for entering the Department ID and Guide
Password appears. ? 4 5 6
To operate again, enter the Department ID and Additional Functions
Password again. 7 8 9
Interrupt Clear
IMPORTANT ID 0 C
• If you do not press the ID key after finishing your

operation, any subsequent copies will be totaled
under the same Department ID which you previ-
ously entered.
NOTE
• When operating is completed, the screen for enter-
ing the Password automatically appears after the
set time has elapsed if you forget to press the ID
key. (See “Auto Clear Function,” on p. 48.)
Entering the Department ID and Password 10-5

Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display

At screens which require alphanumeric entry, enter characters using the alphabet keys displayed in
the touch panel display as described below.
Entering Alphabet Characters

Example: Enter “canon”.
1
Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select “Alpha-

bet”.
NOTE
• Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the
entry mode.
• If you press the [Uppercase] key, the entry mode

changes to the upper case mode, and upper case
characters can be entered.
2 Enter “canon”.
NOTE
• The available modes and maximum number of let-
ters vary depending on the purpose.
• To enter a space, press the [Space] key.
• To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key.
• If you make a mistake when entering characters,
10
use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace] key to

delete the character. Then, enter the correct char-
acter.
• You can also delete all characters you have
Clear
entered by pressing the C key.
• To continue entering special letters, press the
[Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then,
enter the character.
3 When you have entered all characters, press

the [OK] key.
10-6 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display

Entering Special Letters

Example: Enter “é”.
1 Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select

“Other”.
NOTE
• Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the
entry mode.

2 Press the [▼] or [▲] key to display the desired
special letter.

Press the desired special letter in the touch panel
display.
NOTE
• The available modes and maximum number of let-
ters vary depending on the purpose.
• To enter a space, press the [Space] key.
• To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key.
• If you make a mistake when entering special let-
ters, use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace]
key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct
character.
• You can also delete all characters you have
10
Clear
entered by pressing the C key.
• To continue entering alphabet characters, press the
[Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then,
enter the character.
3 When you have finished entering the special

letters, press the [OK] key.
Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display 10-7

Setting in Inches
When entering values in inches in the modes which require number entry, set the inch entry function
to On in the Common Settings of the Additional Functions. You can make entry in inches when you
press the [Inch] key on the screen which requires number entry.
The example shows the inch entry in the Zoom Program mode.
Press the [1] [_] [1] [/] and [2] keys on the
touch panel display in that order.
The entered values is displayed as shown on the

right.
10
10-8 Setting in Inches

Appendix 11 CH APTER
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Appendix
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Chart of Available Combination of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11
Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-1
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Main Unit
Name Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series
Type Console
Platen Stationary
Photoconductive material A-si
Copying system Electrostatic Transfer System
Appendix
Developing system Toner Projection System

Fixing system Heat Roller system
11
Resolution Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Writing approx. 1,200 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing approx. 2,400 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of tones 256
Acceptable paper stock Plain paper
Paper drawer 1, 2 : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index
(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Paper drawer 3, 4 : 17-lb bond to 24-lb bond
(64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Stack bypass : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index
(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Transparency*, Tracing paper*, Labels*, Heavy,
Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch
(*stack bypass selected)
Acceptable originals Sheet, books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to 4.4-lb
bond or 2 kg)
Maximum original size 11"x17"
Paper sizes Paper drawer 1, 2: LTR
Paper drawer 3, 4: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
You can only change the sizes of the paper drawer 3.
Stack bypass : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR
Free-size: 4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17"
(100 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm)
11-2 Specifications
Non-image areas Leading edge: 1/8" (4.0 mm)

Left and right side: 1/8" (2.5 mm)
Trailing edge: 1/8" (2.0 mm)
Warm-up time When main power is turned ON:
5 minutes max.
Activation time from Sleep mode:
5 minutes max.
Activation time from Energy Saver mode:
None : 0 second
–10% mode: approx. 50 sec.
*Activation time from each mode is a rough standard
Appendix
until the machine is ready to copy after canceling the
mode. Activation time may vary depending on the
conditions under which the machine is used. (In all
11
cases, at a room temperature of 68°F.)
First copy time Platen glass selected : 3.8 seconds max.
Copy speed
Direct imageRUNNER 5000
11"x17" 30 cpm
LGL 36 cpm
LTR 50 cpm
LTRR 39 cpm
STMTR 50 cpm
Reduction
11"x17"→ STMTR (50%) 50 cpm
11"x17"→ LTRR (64%) 39 cpm
11"x17"→ LGL (73%) 36 cpm
LGL→ LTR (78%) 39 cpm
Enlargement
LGL→ 11"x17" (121%) 30 cpm
LTRR → 11"x17" (129%) 30 cpm
STMT→ 11"x17" (200%) 30 cpm
: Except the stack bypass.
Specifications 11-3
Magnification Direct
1:1 (±0.5%)
Reduction
1 : 0.789 (LGL→ LTR)
1 : 0.733 (11"x17"→ LGL/ 11"x15"→ LTR)
1 : 0.647 (11"x17"→ LTR)
1 : 0.500 (11"x17"→ STMT)
1 : 0.250
Enlargement
1 : 1.214 (LGL→ 11"x17")
1 : 1.294 (LTR→ 11"x17")
1 : 2.000 (STMT→ 11"x17")
1 : 4.000
Paper feeding system Paper drawer 1, 2 (1,500 sheets each)
Appendix
Paper drawer 3, 4 (550 sheets each)

Stack bypass (stack bypass tray: 50 sheets 20-Ib
bond (80 g/m2); stack approx. 1/4" (5 mm) high)
11
Exposure control Automatic exposure control or manual exposure control

Multiple copies 999 sheets max.
Power source 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A
Max power consumption 1.5 kW
Dimensions (H x W x D) 44-3/4" x 25-3/8" x 29-1/4"
(1,136 mm x 643 mm x 743 mm)
Installation space (W x D) 52-5/8" x 29-1/4" (1,335 mm x 743 mm)
(Dimensions of eject tray and stack bypass tray are
given for extended condition.)
Weight Approx. 462 lb (210 kg)
11-4 Specifications
Feeder
Originals 11" x 17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT
Original paper weights 13-lb bond to 32-lb bond (50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
Original tray capacity 100 sheets
Original replacement speed 55 sheets/minute (LTR)
Power source From main unit
Power consumption When active : 48 W max.
When not active : 2.5 W max.
Dimensions (H x W x D) 5-7/8" x 22-1/4" x 21-1/2"
(149 mm x 565 mm x 545 mm)
Appendix
Weight Approx. 30.8 lb (14 kg)
Paper Deck-G1
11
Paper deck capacity 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power consumption 40 W
Dimensions (H x W x D) 22-5/8" x 12-3/4" x 23" (574 mm x 323 mm x 583 mm)
Weight Approx. 101 lb (46 kg)
Acceptable paper size LTR
Specifications 11-5
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2

Paper 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Saddle Stitcher Unit* : 17-lb bond to 20-lb bond
(64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
(For cover sheets only* : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index
(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2))
Capacity per tray [Non-collate mode]
LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent
to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond
(80 g/m2))
11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent
to 500 sheets 20-lb bond
(80 g/m2))
Appendix
[Collate mode] [Group mode]

LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent
to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond
(80 g/m2))
11
11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent

to 500 sheets 20-lb bond
(80 g/m2))
[Staple mode]
LTR : 30 sets or 4-3/8" (110 mm)
(equivalent to 750 sheets 20-
lb bond (80 g/m2))
11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sets or 2-7/8" (74 mm)
(equivalent to 500 sheets 20-
lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Non-collate]/ [Collate]/ [Group], with different paper size
1-3/4" (44 mm) (equivalent to 300 sheets 20-lb
bond (80 g/m2))
[Staple] with different paper size
30 sets or 7/8" (22 mm) (equivalent to 150
sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))
[Saddle Stitch]*
1 to 5 sheets : 25 sets
11-6 Specifications
Max. stapling capacity Staple Unit

LTR : 50 sheets
11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets
Saddle Stitcher Unit * : 15 sheets
Available offset size 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR
Available staple size Corner staple: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR
Double staple: 11"x17"/ LTR
Available saddle stitch size* 11"x17"/ LTRR
Saddle Stitcher Folding Method* Roller pressure folding
Saddle Stitcher Folding mode* V-fold
Power consumption 170 W max.
Appendix
Dimensions (H x W x D) Finisher
41-3/8" x 26-3/8" x 24-1/4"
(1,052 mm x 669 mm x 614 mm)
11
Finisher + Puncher Unit-B1
41-3/8" x 29-3/8" x 24-1/4"
(1,052 mm x 744.5 mm x 614 mm)
Installation location (W x D) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2
61-3/8" x 29-1/4"
(1,559 mm x 743 mm)
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1
64-3/8" x 29-1/4"
(1,634 mm x 743 mm)
Saddle Finisher-F2 (The width includes necessary
space for removing paper jams.)
72-5/8" x 29-1/4"
(1,844 mm x 743 mm)
Weight Finisher-F1: Approx. 70.5 lb (32 kg)
Saddle Finisher-F2: Approx. 114 lb (52 kg)
Finisher-F1 + Puncher Unit-B1:
Approx. 82.4 lb (37.4 kg)
Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1:
Approx. 126 lb (57.4 kg)
*Saddle Finisher-F2 only.
Specifications 11-7
Puncher Unit-B1
Paper 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Hole punching system Sequential processing system
Punch hole quantity, hole diameter
2 holes/ 3 holes, 8±0.5 mm
Distance between punch holes
3 holes: 4-1/4" (108mm)
2 holes: 2-3/4" (70 mm)
Paper size in which holes can be punched
3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR
2 holes: LGL/ LTRR
Appendix
Punch waste tray capacity Approx. 3,000 sheets

(20-lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power consumption 120W max.
11
Power source From the Finisher

Dimensions (H x W x D) 34-7/8" x 3" x 24-1/4"
(886 mm x 75.5 mm x 614.4 mm)
Weight Approx. 11.9 lb (5.4 kg)
Copy Tray-C3
Capacity 250 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))
Dimensions (H x W x D) 4" x 18-3/8" x 13-3/8"
(100 mm x 465 mm x 340 mm)
Weight Approx. 1.4 lb (670 g)
Card Reader-C1
Card to be Used Magnetic type card, Optical type card
Card readout method Magnetic/Optical readout
Magnetic Card Reading Direction
Inserting Direction
Store/ Replay Replay
Power Source From main unit
Size (H x W x D) 1-1/8” x 3-1/2” x 4 (32 mm x 88 mm x 100 mm)
Weight 10.4 oz (295 g)
11-8 Specifications
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper

Orientation
● When you set the left-side stapling
NOTE
• Please use this chart when printing on paper with logos etc., printed beforehand.
Confidential
Output Confidential Confidential
example Confidential Confidential

Confidential
Confidential
Original/
paper
orientation,
settings LTR 11"x17", LGL LTR 11"x17", LGL
Appendix
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation
in paper
drawer 1, 2
11
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC
Orientation laitnedifnoC
in paper
drawer 3, 4
Orientation in Confidential Confidential

Confidential
Confidential
stack bypass/
Confidential
paper deck
Orientation on
the platen glass
Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopRight Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopLeft

Staple setting
Double :Left Double :Right Double :Left
Orientation in
the feeder
Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopRight Corner :TopRight

Staple setting
Double :Left Double :Left Double :Right
Either On or Off
Auto Orientation (Set to On when
Either On or Off Either On or Off paper orientation Either On or Off
setting
in paper drawers
is vertical.)
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation 11-9

Chart of Available Combination of Functions

The chart shows how the settings will be when you want to set a function different from a function
already set.
Copy Function
Combination available
Switch uto Orientation

✕ Combination unavailable
l
Contro
Auto D aper Selection, tion

▲
set
Priority to latter-set mode
lec
ing
A
Appendix
Printe c Exposure
Automati c Paper Se
eady
●
ation
Priority to Image Combination,

Progra e
Offset rouping
od
Rotate ollating
m
on alr
d
Image Separation, and Booklet
Reserv Copy
1 2-S Copy
e
Collate pass
Collate
oom m
2-Side
Design
Hole P titch
Staple roup
ement
Autom age
d Imag
rawer
mode (Ratio can be changed)
Interru ch
Autom to
2 2-S ed
2 1-S ed
ided
om
un
S
cP
Im
ho
G
ati
ati
By
C
Functi
pt
e
id
id
Saddle
Auto Z
Rotate
Enlarg
Text/P
XY Zo
Group
Offset
Entire
Photo
Zoom
Zoom
Stack
11
Book
Text
Function intend to set

Enlargement ▲▲▲ ▲
Zoom Designation ▲ ▲▲ ▲
XY Zoom ▲▲ ▲ ▲
Auto Zoom mode ▲▲▲ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕
Zoom Program ▲▲▲▲
Entire Image ✕
Automatic Exposure Control ▲▲ ▲▲
Printed Image ▲ ▲ ▲▲
Photo ▲ ▲ ▲▲
Text ▲ ▲▲ ▲
Text/Photo ▲ ▲▲ ▲
Automatic Paper Selection ✕ ▲ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕
Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation ✕ ▲ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕
Auto Drawer Switching *1
Stack Bypass *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Collate ▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
Group ▲ ▲▲▲▲▲▲
Rotate Collating ✕ ✕ ▲▲ ▲▲▲▲▲
Rotate Grouping ✕ ✕ ▲▲▲ ▲▲▲▲
Offset Collate ▲▲▲▲ ▲▲▲
Offset Group ▲▲▲▲▲ ▲▲
Staple ▲▲▲▲▲▲ ▲
Saddle Stitch ✕ ✕ *1 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ✕
Hole Punch *1
Interrupt Copy
Reserve Copy
1 2-Sided ▲▲▲
2 2-Sided ▲ ▲▲
2 1-Sided ✕ ▲▲ ▲
Book 2-Sided ✕ ▲▲▲
*1 You cannot combine these modes when free size is selected.
11-10 Chart of Available Combination of Functions

Switch uto Orientation

l
Contro
Auto D aper Selection, tion

▲
set
lec
ing
A
Printe c Exposure
Automati c Paper Se
eady
●
ation
Zoom m mode
Offset rouping
Rotate ollating
m
on alr
d
Reserv Copy
1 2-S Copy
e
Collate pass
Collate
2-Side
Design
Hole P titch
Progra
Staple roup
ement
Autom age
d Imag
rawer
Interru ch
Autom to
2 2-S ed
2 1-S ed
ided
om
un
oo
S
cP
Im
ho
G
ati
ati
By
C
Functi
pt
e
id
id
Saddle
Auto Z
Rotate
Enlarg
Text/P
XY Zo
Group
Offset
Entire
Photo
Zoom
Stack
Book
Text
Two-page Separation *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image Combination ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image Separation ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Original Frame Erase ✕
Appendix
Book Frame Erase ✕
Binding Erase ✕ ✕
Right Margin
Left Margin
Top Margin
11
Bottom Margin
Shift ▲ *1
Front Cover *4 *4 *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sheet Insertion (Printed/Blank) *4 *4 *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Chapter Page *4 *4 *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transparency Interleaving ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Booklet ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Booklet/ Saddle Stitch ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Front Cover (Printed/Blank) ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sample Set ✕ ✕ ✕ *2 *3
Different Size Originals ✕ ✕
Job Build
Sharpness
Nega/Posi
Image Repeat ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ *1 ✕
Mirror Image
*2 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode.
*3 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Reserve Copy mode.
*4 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set.
Chart of Available Combination of Functions 11-11

lank)
)
/Blank
aving
nted/B
▲
set
als
tch
n
Interle
Samp ver (Printed

Image e Separatio
e Eras
Job Bu Size Origin

eady
ination
Chapte sertion (Pri
dle Sti
Bindin rame Erase
●
Origin eparation
on alr
Margin
Mirror epeat
e
Transp Page
arency
al Fram
Comb
g Eras
t/ Sad
Left M rgin
Image
Sheet ver
Differe Set
Bottom in
Top M in
Nega/P ss
Image si
arg
arg
ild
Ma
ag
o
Functi
Co
Co
nt
ne
R
S
In
r
le
t
Book F
Bookle
Bookle
Two-p
Image
Sharp
Right
Front
Front
Shift
Enlargement ● ● ● ● ●
Zoom Designation ● ● ● ● ●
XY Zoom ● ● ● ● ●
Auto Zoom mode ✕
Appendix
Zoom Program ● ● ● ● ●
Entire Image ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Automatic Exposure Control
Printed Image
Photo
11
Text
Text/Photo
Automatic Paper Selection ✕ ✕ *4 *4 *4 ✕ ✕ ✕
Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation ✕ ✕ *4 *4 *4 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Auto Drawer Switching ✕ ✕
Stack Bypass *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ✕ *1 *1 *1 *1
Collate ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Group ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Rotate Collating ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Rotate Grouping ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Offset Collate ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Offset Group ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple Collate ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Saddle Stitch ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Hole Punch ✕ ✕
Interrupt Copy *5
Reserve Copy *6
1 2-Sided ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 2-Sided ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 1-Sided ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Book 2-Sided ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
*5 You cannot make Interrupt copy while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while
changing the settings after the Sample Set has been made.
*6 You cannot reserve a copy job while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while chang-
ing the settings after the Sample Set has been made.

lank)
)
ing
nted/B
/Blank
set
▲
terleav
ls
h
on
rame E rase
Job Bu Size Origina

tc
eady
Separa ation
Chapte sertion (Pri
Samp ver (Printed

eparati
dle Sti
g Eras rase
●
al Fram n
eE
tio
In
on alr
in
Margin
t
e
Transp Page
arency
R epea
Comb
t/ Sad
Margin
Image
age S
Sheet ver
Differe Set
Bottom in
argin
Nega/P ss
Image si
arg
ild
Functi
Co
o
nt
ne
In
r
le
t
o
Book F
Bookle
Bookle
Top M
Two-p
Image
Image
Bindin
Left M
Add C
Origin
Sharp
Mirror
Right
Front
Shift
Two-page Separation ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image Combination ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲✕ ✕ ✕ ✕▲▲▲ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image Separation ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Original Frame Erase ✕ ✕ ▲▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Appendix
Book Frame Erase ✕ ✕▲ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Binding Erase ✕ ✕▲ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Right Margin ▲▲▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Left Margin ▲ ▲▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Top Margin ▲▲ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11
Bottom Margin ▲▲▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Shift ▲ *7 ✕ ✕
Front Cover ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sheet Insertion (Printed/Blank) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Chapter Page ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transparency Interleaving ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Booklet ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Booklet/ Saddle Stitch ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Front Cover (Printed/Blank) ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sample Set ✕
Different Size Originals ✕ ✕ ✕ *7 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Job Build
Sharpness
Nega/Posi
Image Repeat ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Mirror Image ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
*7 You cannot combine these modes when the automatic paper selection is selected. When
selecting the paper manually, you can combine these modes.
Chart of Available Combination of Functions 11-13

Mail Box Function

Record ize Auto Se Select

l
Contro
mode/ nted Image
e Man elect
t
l Selec
▲
set
Enlarg size Manua ct

als
ual
S
le
ing
Book F rame Erase

Image e Separatio
eady
Docum nt size Auto
Photo c Exposure
Origin
Origin ombination
Photo
scann
Bindin rame Erase

●
ation
2-Side canning
Two-p Scanning
Differe canning
ning
Pri
on alr
Autom gram
Bookle rase
ent siz
nt Size
Design
ement
mode/
r scan
glass
Zoom om
1-Side to
ness
osi
Pro
dS
al F
gE
tS
om
ild
s
ho
Functi
ati
ag
C
e
Nega/P
Record
Docum
Job Bu
Auto Z
Text/P
Platen
Feede
XY Zo
Sharp
Photo
Zoom
Text
Platen glass scanning *8
Feeder scanning *8 ✕
Appendix
Document size Auto Select ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

Document size Manual Select ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Record size Auto Select ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Record size Manual Select ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Enlargement ✕ ▲ ▲▲▲ ● ●
11
Zoom Designation ✕▲ ▲▲▲ ● ●

XY Zoom ✕▲▲ ▲▲ ● ●
Auto Zoom ✕ ✕ ▲▲ ▲ ▲
Zoom Program ✕▲▲ ▲▲ ● ●
Automatic Exposure Control ✕ ▲ ▲▲▲
Photo mode/ Printed Image ✕ ▲ ▲▲▲
Photo mode/ Photo ✕ ▲▲ ▲▲
Text ✕ ▲▲ ▲ ▲
Text/Photo ✕ ▲▲ ▲▲
1-Sided Scanning ✕ ▲
2-Sided Scanning ✕ ▲ ✕
Two-page Separation ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Image Combination ✕ ✕ ● ● ● ● ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕▲✕
Original Frame Erase ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ▲✕
Book Frame Erase ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ▲✕
Binding Erase ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲▲ ✕
Booklet Scanning ✕ ✕ ● ● ● ● ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Different Size Originals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Job Build ✕
Sharpness ✕
Nega/Posi ✕
*8 You can combine these modes when the Job Build mode is set.

Index
1 to 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
1 to 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
2 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
4 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
8 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
1 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2 1-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Appendix
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 4-14
Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Additional Functions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
11
Additional Functions key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adjusting a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Adjustment/Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Audible Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Auto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 4-15
Auto Clear Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Auto Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Auto Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Auto Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Auto XY Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
B
Back Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31, 4-35
Black toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 4-34
Book 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 4-72
Booklet Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Box Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Index 11-15
Box Set/ Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
C
Cancel Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Change Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Change Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Clip holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Appendix
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
11
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Control panel power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
COPY key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Copy Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 4-15
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Counter Check key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Cover/Job Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Cover/Sheet Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
D
Daily Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Dark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12
Date & Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Department ID Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 4-43
Display contrast dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Document Size Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Done Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Duplexing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
11-16 Index
E
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Energy Saver key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Entire Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
F
Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Feeder cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 4-63
Appendix
Finisher-F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Fixing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 4-29
11
Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Function Key Wake Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
G
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Guide Function Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Guide key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
H
Hole Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
I
ID key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Image Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 4-37
Image Orientation Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Image Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Initial Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Initialize Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Initialize Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Interrupt key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Interrupt Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Index 11-17
J
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 4-45
Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
L
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
LTRR/ STMT Original Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
M
Appendix
MAIL BOX key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Mail Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Main Power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
11
Main power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Merge Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Mode Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 4-51, 4-77
N
Nega/Posi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60, 4-47
Next Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Non-collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Numeric keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
O
OK key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 4-30
Original output area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Original supply tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
11-18 Index
P
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Paper drawer 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Paper drawer 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Paper Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Paper stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13
Photo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 4-15
Printed Img. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13
Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Appendix
Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Processing/Data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
11
R
Rear side of platen glass cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Reserve Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Reserve Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
S
Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Sample Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
SCAN key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Setting Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67, 4-49
Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Index 11-19
Slide guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Special Features Screen 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Special Features Screen 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
StackBypass Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Standard Key Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Standard Local Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Standard Stack Bypass Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Start key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Appendix
Stop key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Store Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
11
System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
T
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13
Text/Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13
Time Until Unit Quiets Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Toner supply cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Transparency Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Two-page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 4-27
Two-sided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Two-sided Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Two-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
U
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
W
Wire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
11-20 Index
X
XY Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 4-21
Z
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 4-20
Zoom Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 4-16
Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Zoom Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 4-20
Appendix
11
Index 11-21
E82_US.book Page i Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
System Management Mode of the

✂
imageRUNNER 5000 Series

The following pages regarding the use and operations of the System Management mode, should be
cut out of the manual by the supervisor or the system manager.
You can set restrictions to the System Settings of the Additional Functions or manage the settings
set by other users by setting the System Settings of the Additional Functions. This mode is call the
System Management mode.
The operations which can be done in the System Management mode are as follows:
✂
• Box Document Management

• Box Setting Management
Entering the System Management Mode

■ When Department ID Management is Enabled
Enter the System Manager ID in the [Depart-

ment ID], and the System Password in the
✂
[Password] with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ),

and press the ID key.
The machine enters the System Management
Mode.
■ When Department ID Management is not Enabled

✂
1 Press the
key.
Reset
1 2 3
Guide
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Cle
ID 0 C
✂
✂
i
E82_US.book Page ii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
✂
2 Press the [System Settings] key.
✂
3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with
the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID
key.
Mode.
NOTE
✂
• Enter the number stored under System Manager
Settings. (See “Setting/ Changing the System Man-
ager ID and Password,” on p. 6-55.)
Canceling the System Management Mode
Press the ID key. 1 2 3
✂
Guide
The System Management Mode is canceled. ? 4 5 6
NOTE 7 8 9
• The System Management Mode is also canceled Interrupt Clear
even when Auto Clear has taken place. The display ID 0 C
returns to the screen of the function selected in the
Auto Clear Setting.
Processing
/Data Error
✂
✂
ii
E82_US.book Page iii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
✂
Managing Box in the System Management Mode

You can operate the box documents stored by the users. For example, you can operate a box that
the user has forgotten the password, erase unnecessary documents, or in case of need, access to
box documents of other users.
1 Enter the System Management Mode.

Reset
1 2 3
✂
Guide
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
Interrupt Cle
ID 0 C
2 Press the MAIL BOX key.

✂
COPY MAIL BOX SCAN
3
✂
Proceed to operate the box.

(See Chapter 4 “Using the Mail Box Functions.”)
✂
✂
iii
E82_US.book Page iv Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
✂
Changing the Box Settings in the System Management Mode
You can change the box settings restricted with a password. For example, you can initialize
unnecessary box, or change the name of the box.
1 Press the
key.
Reset
NOTE 1 2 3
• When the machine is already in the System Man- Guide
✂
agement mode, press the
key and proceed ? 4 5 6
to step 5. Additional Functions
7 8 9
Interrupt Cle
ID 0 C
When Department ID Management is enabled,

enter the System Manager ID in the [Department
ID], and the System Password in the [Password],
with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the
ID key.
✂
2 Press the [System Settings] key.
✂
✂
✂
iv
E82_US.book Page v Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
✂
3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with

the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID
key.
Mode.
NOTE
• Enter the number stored under System Manager
✂
Settings. (See “Setting/ Changing the System Man-

ager ID and Password,” on p. 6-55.)

The display returns to the Additional Functions
screen.
✂
5 Press the [Mail Box Settings] key, and change

the settings.
(See “Setting Specifications of the Mail Box
Function (Mail Box Settings),” on p. 6-46.)
✂
✂
✂
v
E82_US.book Page vi Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
E82_US.book Page vii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM
✂
Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the

Breaker
This page should be cut out of the user’s guide and copied for future use.
After cutting out of the user’s guide, store this page in a safe place near the machine.
■ How to Inspect the Breaker periodically

Follow the procedure described in the “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker” on p. 26 of the
imageRUNNER 5000 Series User’s Guide, once or twice a month.
✂
■ How to Fill in this Check Sheet

Fill in the date of inspection, and the name of inspector.
When the inspection finished normally, write a check mark under “OK”.
If not, contact your service representative. (Also write a check mark under “NG”.)
Date of Result Date of Result

Inspector Inspector
Inspection OK NG Inspection OK NG
✂
✂
✂
✂

Ir5000 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir5000 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E82_US.

book Page 1 Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

imageRUNNER 5000 Series

International Energy Star-Program

How This Manual is Organized

Before You Start Using This Machine

Useful Copy Functions

Using the Mail Box Functions

Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Loading Paper and Adding Toner

Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to

How This Manual is Organized 3

DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals

How to Use this Machine User’s Guide

For Remote UI Use Remote UI Guide

For setting up the network connection &

For Postscript/PCL Use PS/PCL Reference Guide

For Installing the Printer Driver, etc

For Installing the Printer Driver, etc PCL Driver Guide

For Connecting and Setting the Network Network Guide

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This

Scanning an original to be copied, or

Outputting a copy, outputting data

6 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine

Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Chapter 2 Basic Copying

Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate

Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Chapter 5 Printing Efficiently

Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24

Chapter 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Chapter 9 Handling Options

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Removing Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

How to Use This Manual

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page 1

Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

7 (See “Placing Originals,” on p.1-11.)

2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.

3-2 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)

1 Section Title 7 Reference

How to Use This Manual 15

Symbols Used in This Manual

16 Symbols Used in This Manual

• Do not place the following items on the machine.

• Do not install the machine in such a way that the

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as

• Do not install the machine in the following loca-